Home

DAQSTATION DX100P/DX200P Communication

image

Contents

1. 5 6 Control Commands CC Disconnects an Ethernet connection Syntax cc pl lt terminator gt pl Disconnect the connection 0 Example Disconnect the connection cc 0 Description This command can be used only during Ethernet communications When this command is executed you are logged out FR Sets the acquiring interval to the FIFO buffer Syntax FR pl lt terminator gt pl FIFO acquiring interval 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S Query FR Example Set the FIFO acquiring interval to 1 s FR 1S Description e 125 MS 250 MS and 500 MS apply only to models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P e Set the acquiring interval to a value greater than the scan interval e Ifthe scan interval is set to a value less than the acquiring interval using the XV command or from the screen the acquiring interval is automatically set equal to the scan interval The DXP has a circular FIFO buffer The measured computed values are acquired to the internal memory at predetermined time intervals from the time the power is turned ON and the data are output when a FF command is received The previous output position is held for each connection and is updated when the next set of data is output with the FF command Using this functionality data can be collected without data dropouts if the PC reads the data in the circular buffer before the data are overacquired This compensates for the communication time differences that result from p
2. Setting Function and Monitor Function Two functions setting function and monitor function are available The functions are the same as when using the Ethernet network See page 1 2 Dedicated Commands Uses dedicated commands for the DXP See chapter 5 Connection If you set the serial communication function of the DXP and connect the PC and the DXP the DXP is ready to receive commands from the PC Ifthe DXP is configured to use the login function Monitor function commands output commands can be executed In addition a portion of the control commands of the setting function can be executed Log into the DXP when executing control commands The commands that you can execute vary depending on whether you are logged in as an administrator or a user However login is not possible in the following cases When an administrator or a user is already logged in using keys e When there is a user logged into the setting function via the Ethernet interface DXP Administrator user name eo A portion of the on er ao sited ere Password control commands No need to log in 2 Ifthe DXP is configured not to use the login function no administrators are registered setting function commands can be executed IM 04L05A01 17E 1 11 SUOIJOUNY UONLIIUNWIWOD 3y JO MBIAIOAO 1 2 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Serial Interface Modbus Slave For a description of how to use the communication function
3. BINARY see pages 6 2 and 6 25 BINARY header BINARY data BINARY footer IM 04L05A01 17E App 3 xipueddy E Appendix 3 Output Flow of the File or the File List in the External Storage Medium Example in which the file 10101000 DBD in the DATAO directory is output START ME GET DATA0 10101000 DBD Specify the file name using the full pathy and output the file Command to send Command description Received response data BINARY header BINARY data BINARY footer Send command Output Me nexr i PA dia Are there more data YES BNA BINARY header BINARY data BINARY footer l l z NO When bit 0 of the BINARY header flag is 0 More data exist 1 Data transmission is complete App 4 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 3 Output Flow of the File or the File List in the External Storage Medium Example in which the file list belonging to directory DATAO is output 10 files at a time START Send command me DIR DATA0 10 xxxKbyte free EN H File lists Are there ore file lists YES NO ME DIRNEXT file lists the het ai al ASCII See page 6 21 xxxKbyte free EN ze File lists Command to send
4. Command description Received response data Specify the number of file lists to be Output command for the first file list output when issuing this command When the number of output file lists is smaller than the maximum number of file lists specified by the ME DIR command 10 in this example one can conclude that there are no more file lists IM 04L05A01 17E App 5 xipueddy E Appendix 4 Login Process and Messages during the Login Process To use the setting measurement server or the maintenance test server via the Ethernet interface the user logs into the DXP from the PC If you complete the process successfully up to login complete in the following figure the commands in become functional When Using the Login Function of the DXP Connect communications the number of onnections Symbols eS Start lt gt Decision CZ End C_D Transition User entry E1 403 Response from the DXP messages are omitted Code Recorded to the operation log No a The number of simultaneous users see section 2 1 is exceeded Incorrect user name Incorrect user ID b There is a user logged in using the keys on the DXP or there is a user logged in using the same user name c Incorrect password total number of failures is less than 3 d Incorrect password total number of failures is 3 User is invalidated 1 Connections cannot exceed the maximum nu
5. see page 1 6 i Details 2 52 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 13 Using the E Mail Transmission Function Procedure Starting the e mail transmission 1 Press the FUNC key The FUNC menu appears The structure of the FUNC menu varies depending on the basic settings and options If Next is displayed as a choice this indicates that there are multiple lines of choices Press the Next soft key to display the menu with the E Mail start item 2 Press the E mail start soft key E mail transmission is started An e mail transmission function icon is displayed in the status display section of the DXP Stopping the e mail transmission 1 Press the FUNC key The FUNC menu appears The structure of the FUNC menu varies depending on the basic settings and options If Next is displayed as a choice this indicates that there are multiple lines of choices Press the Next soft key to display the menu with the E Mail stop item 2 Press the E mail stop soft key E mail transmission is stopped The e mail transmission function icon disappears from the status display section of the DXP Note eS The E Mail START and E Mail STOP soft keys are displayed on the FUNC key menu when the Recipient1 or Recipient2 for alarm scheduled system or report e mails is set to ON IM 04L05A01 17E 2 53 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 14 Using the Maintenance Test Server Required Settings Logging In Explanat
6. 5 34 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 7 Output Commands 5 7 Output Commands BO Sets the output byte order Syntax BO pl lt terminator gt pl Byte order 0 Sends MSB first 1 Sends LSB first Query BO Example Output MSB first BO 0 Description This command is used to specify the byte order for the numerical data during binary output A binary value 01011111 00001010 is output in the order 00001010 first and 01011111 last when LSB first is specified CS Sets the checksum This command can be used only during serial communications Syntax CS pl lt terminator gt pl Use not use checksum 0 Not use 1 Use Query CS Example Use the checksum cs 1 IF Sets the status filter Syntax IF pl lt terminator gt pl Status filter value 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 Query IF Example Set the status value to 1 0 4 0 IF 1 0 4 0 Description For details see chapter 7 Note Initialization of BO CS IF Command Settings e For Serial Communications Settings entered using the BO CS IF commands revert to their initial values output byte order checksum 0 status filter 000 000 000 000 when the DXP is reset when the power is turned OFF then ON or the user exits the basic setting mode If the DXP is reset you must restore these settings e For Ethernet Communications Settings entered using the BO IF commands revert to their initial values when the connection to the DXP is cut After reconnecting the DXP you must reent
7. eu u JOUJOYTy ey Busy D 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server User Locked If the login operation is carried out with a wrong password for three consecutive times the user is invalidated From that point the user can no longer log in e Clearing the User Locked Condition Administrators can clear the user locked condition For the procedure see section 6 1 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Error Messages If an error message is displayed while logging in see appendix 4 and carry out the corrective action DXP Operation Log Operations are recorded in the DXP operation log 2 20 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server Procedure First Login The password is set to the default password immediately after registering a user in the DXP login function When logging in for the first time you are prompted to change the password 1 Specify the destination DXP using a host name or IP address The port number 34260 is used to specify the setting measurement server The DXP returns the following message E1 402 Select function from setting or monitor 2 To log into the setting function enter setting To log into the monitor function enter monitor The DXP returns the following message E1 400 Input username 3 Enter the user name The DXP returns the following message E1 405 Input user ID 4 Enter the user ID The DXP returns the following
8. output format of ASCII data output format of BINARY data output format of instrument information eeee 2 58 overview of the Configuration cccccececseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 9 P paraMEeter ooo eeeeeeeeeeneeeaeceeeeaeeeeetaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeates parameter instrument information parity CHECK isiin PASSWOIG serinati earr password FTP server PASV mode ceceeeeeeeeteeeteees pin arrangement RS 422A 485 POrt NUMDET cee eeeeesteneeneeseeeeneerseesenes PIIMALY weseccvecvesensaesevscttveeccaeressesvyeendsecnsecsedvecustnvsdtedeccce protocol Modbus protocol normal barcode OAD CV CIO secsccs Sseicscce linceisds AnatndeesibecsiezsGacstaesilacciaubuihaciadveass 4 7 OAL DAO aoa sate das scce T cased T A eececacncatencrs v receive buffer recipient refreshing the monitor page ws register ASSIQNMENHS ceeeeeeeeeeeceeteeeteeeeeeeeaeeeteteeeeteaee FOSDONSO ereere cavett caceeveretaterectovecesscstdsct revs ceeseaashsreecnesta ts response instrument information s reESponSe SyntaX eceeeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeneees resuming command transmission retialS eresie einai tient aninsiaiaiiies RS 232 interface CONNECHON ceecceeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees RS 232 interface specification RS 232 Standard ccccccceceececeeeneeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeseeeseeeeneees RS 422A 485
9. AAAAAAAA EJ AAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBB Set the new password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters When you logged into the monitor function this command cannot be executed if there is a user who logged in using keys or a user logged into the setting function via the communications Sets the date and time SD pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Date YY MM DD fixed form YY Year 00 to 99 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 31 5 6 Control Commands MM Month 01 to 12 DD Day 01 to 31 p2 Time HH MM SS fixed form HH Hour 00 to 23 MM Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 MEMORY Memory summary display ALARMACK Alarm ACK summary display p4 The group number 1 to 4 to display in the upper left quadrant of the divided screen screen 1 p5 The display item of the lower left Query SD quadrant of the divided screen Example Set the internal clock to 13 00 00 screen 2 same as the selections October 1 2002 for p3 SD 02 10 01 13 00 00 p6 The group number 1 to 4 to display Description The form of p1 and p2 is fixed to 8 characters in the lower left quadrant of the Use the following form Do not enter spaces divided screen screen 2 in between the digits as an error will occur p7 The display item of the upper right p1 YY MM DD Lower two digits of the year quadrant of the divided screen month day screen 3 same as the selections p2 HH MM SS Hour minute second for p3 This command cannot b
10. YV 1 Cont good co jp Adm good co jp To specify multiple addresses delimit the addresses using spaces Sets the sender s address YW pl lt terminator gt pl Sender s address Up to 64 characters YW Set the sender s addresses to DX210P YW DX210P Sets the SMTP server YX pl p2 lt terminator gt pl SMTP server s name Up to 64 characters p2 Port number 0 to 65535 YX Set the SMTP server s name to mhs good co jp and the port number to 25 YX 1 mhs good co jp 25 Sets the FTP client EF pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt pl Priority PRIMARY SECONDARY p2 FTP server name up to 64 characters p3 Port No 0 to 65535 p4 Login name up to 32 characters p5 Password up to 32 characters p6 Account up to 32 characters p7 Use not use PASV PRIMARY SECONDARY p8 Initial path up to 64 characters EF pl Only an administrator can use the query Set the connection to the primary server SS Login name password account port number and initial path are ABC AAAAAAAA Super 21 and home data respectively EF PRIMARY SS 21 ABC AAAAAAAA super OFF home data Sets the Web server EG pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Page type OPERATOR MONITOR p2 Use not use the page ON OFF p3 Use not use access control ON OFF p4 User name up to 20 characters p5 Password up to 8 characters EG pl Only an administrator can use the que
11. e Reading the measured computed data FF GET command Outputs the data from the next to the previous read position RP1 to the most recent acquire position WP In this example more than 2 s has elapsed from the previous read operation Therefore data in blocks 5 and 6 are output e Reading the measured computed data FF GETNEW commana Output the specified number of blocks of FIFO data back starting from the recent acquire position WP In this example if you specify the number of blocks to 5 data in blocks 2 to 6 are output The capacity of the FIFO buffer number of data sets that the FIFO buffer can hold number of the blocks in above example varies depending on the model e DX102P DX104P DX204P DX208P 240 intervals 30 s at an acquiring interval of 125 ms e DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P DX230P 60 intervals 60 s at an acquiring interval of 1 s App 2 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 2 Output Flow of FIFO Data Example in Which the FIFO Acquiring Interval on the DX230P is 1 s and the Measured Computed Data from CH1 to CH60 are Continuously Output Using the FIFO Function Send command l l Lf Command to send START Command description Received response data FF RESET bie the FIFO read position to the most ace acquire position Receive response ee ee ed Wait for the FIFO acquiring interval 1 s FF GET 1 60 Output the measured computed data using the FIFO
12. 20 00 to 20 00 V 2000 to 2000 50 V 50 V 50 00 to 50 00 V 5000 to 5000 Thermocouple TC Measurement Parameter for the Value of the Upper and Value of the Upper and Range SR Command Lower Limits of the Span Lower Limits of the SR Upper and Lower Limits Command of the Measurement Range R R 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 to 17600 S S 0 0 to 1760 0 C 0 to 17600 B B 0 0 to 1820 0 C 0 to 18200 K K 200 0 to 1370 0 C 2000 to 13700 E E 200 0 to 800 0 C 2000 to 8000 J J 200 0 to 1100 0 C 2000 to 11000 T T 200 0 to 400 0 C 2000 to 4000 N N 0 0 to 1300 0 C 0 to 13000 W W 0 0 to 2315 0 C 0 to 23150 L L 200 0 to 900 0 C 2000 to 9000 U U 200 0 to 400 0 C 2000 to 4000 Resistance Temperature Detector RTD Measurement Parameter Value of the Upper Value of the Upper Range forthe SR and Lower Limits of and Lower Limits of Command the Span Upper and the SR Command Lower Limits of the Measurement Range Pt100 PT 200 0 to 600 0 C 2000 to 6000 JPt100 JPT 200 0 to 550 0 C 2000 to 5500 Cul0 GE Cul 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 CulO L amp N CU2 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 Cul0 WEED cu3 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 Cul0O BAILEY cu4 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 Cul0 a 0 00392 at 20 C CU5 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 Cul0 a 0 00393 at 20 C CU6 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 cu25 a 0 00425
13. EC 2 When this command is executed you are logged out When settings are changed this command with p1 0 or 1 cannot be executed unless the external storage medium is inserted to the drive The login information and the batch system settings are not initialized even if parameter p1 is 0 When parameter p1 is 0 settings related to communications are initialized To login via the communications resume the communication settings on the DXP When settings are changed this command cannot be executed unless the external storage medium is inserted to the drive spuewwog Saves the setup data for the system mode YE pl lt terminator gt pl Store or discard the settings STORE ABORT Store the basic settings YE STORE When this command is executed you are logged out When settings are changed this command cannot be executed unless the external storage medium is inserted to the drive Executes the time adjustment using the SNTP client function CL pl lt terminator gt pl Fixed to 0 Execute time adjustment CL 0 When this command is executed time information is retrieved from the SNTP server and the time is adjusted Loads the engineering mode settings LO pl lt terminator gt pl Setup file name up to 8 characters excluding the extension Load the engineering mode settings of setup file ABC PPL LO ABC Only the engineering mode settings are loaded from the setup file in the root dire
14. SNTPtimset Adjusting the time at once using SNTP TimeDST Changing the DST start end time LoginLoad Loading the login information BatchNoSet Setting the batch number LotNoSet Setting the lot number PowerOff The power is turned Off PowerOn The power is turned On EngLoad Loading the setup data on the engineering mode SysLoad Loading the setup data on the system mode EngSet Changing the engineering mode setup data SysSet Changing the system mode setup data LoginSet Changing the login information Log amp SysSet Changing the system mode setup data and the login information Eng amp SysSet Changing the engineering mode and the system mode setup data Log amp EngSet Changing the engineering mode settings and 1 login information settings AllSet Changing the engineering mode settings system 2 and login information mode settings settings EngSave Saving the setup data on the engineering mode SysSave Saving the setup data on the system mode ErrorXXX Error operation XXX Error code WarningXXX Warning XXX code ChgPasswd Changing password ConctClose Being closed by the maintenance test server FileGet Getting files from the DXP FilePut Putting files to the DXP UsrLockACK Clearing the User Locked icon A DCalDisp Entering the AD calibration mode A DCalExec Executing the AD calibration CCSet Changing the calibration correction settings while data
15. Second edition December 2001 e Third edition July 2002 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2001 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L05A01 17E How to Use this Manual Structure of the Manual The structure of this User s Manual is as follows Chapter 1 Overview of the Communication Functions Describes the relationship between the communication functions and the interface and provides an outline of the communication functions Chapter 2 Using the Ethernet Interface Describes the specifications and setup procedures of the Ethernet interface Also describes how to use the setting measurement server FTP client FTP server Web server e mail transmission function maintenance test server and instrument information server Chapter 3 Using the Serial Interface C2 C3 Options Describes the specifications and setup procedures of the serial interface option Also describes how to use the setting measurement function and the barcode input function Chapter 4 Using the Modbus C2 C3 Options Describes the specifications and setup procedures of the Modbus protocol Also describes how to use the Modbus STATUS screen Chapter 5 Commands Describes each command that can be used Chapter 6 Response Describes the data format of the measured computed data and files that are output from this instrument Chapter 7 Status Report Describes the status information Appendix Provides an ASCII character code ta
16. See section 5 9 A oi There is no character string saved in the clipboard Copy a character string to the clipboard A o The character string saved in the clipboard is too long Paste a character string with the specified number of characters 61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression See section 5 18 62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect See section 5 18 63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect See section 5 18 64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal See section 5 18 70 MATH constant description is incorrect See section 5 18 71 The range of the MATH constant is exceeded See section 5 18 80 This username is already registered See section 4 4 81 All space or quit string cannot be specified See section 4 4 83 Duplicate used combination of user ID and password See section 4 4 85 The login password is incorrect See section 6 1 86 The key lock release password is incorrect 87 This key is locked See section 4 4 88 This function is locked See section 4 4 89 Press FUNC key to login See section 6 1 90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode 91 Password is incorrect Enter the correct password See sections 6 1 and 6 3 1 See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IM04
17. Set the e mail address using up to 64 alphanumeric characters If the address is not set the first address set in the recipient box is used as the sender s address instead Settings for transmitting alarm information Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Turns On transmits e mail messages to the recipient or Off does not transmit e mail messages to the recipient for each recipient Alarm number of which the alarm information is to be transmitted via the e mail message alarm 1 alarm 2 alarm 3 and alarm 4 You can turn On Off the function for each alarm number This setting is common to all channels e On If any one of the alarms corresponding to the relevant alarm number on all channels changes alarm occurrence or release an e mail message is transmitted Off The alarm information of the alarm number is not transmitted Contents of the transmitted mail e Add instantaneous values e On Adds to the e mail message the instantaneous values of all channels existing at the time when the alarm condition changed Off The instantaneous values are not added to the e mail message 2 42 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function e Add sender URL Uniform Resource Locator e On If the Web server function is specified on the DXP the URL of the DXP is attached to the e mail Off The URL of the DXP is not attached to the e mail e Subject Set the subject of the e mail message using up to 32 alphanumeric charac
18. lt On gt Dec 24 13 05 16 lt Off gt Dec 24 13 08 17 lt Inst value gt Dec 24 13 08 17 01 0 312V 02 0 267V 03 0 245V 29 0 645V 30 0 649V Access the following URL in order to look at http DX good co jp Sender URL Scheduled e mail From DX good co jp Date Sat 23 Dec 2000 01 00 09 0900 JST Subject DX Periodic_data To useri good co jp LOOP1 Subject Header1 Scheduled Periodic data lt Host name gt DX lt Time gt Header2 Dec 23 01 00 01 Date time Report e mail Alarm date time From DX good co jp Date Sat 23 Dec 2000 23 00 09 0900 JST Subject DX Report_data To userl good co jp user2 good co jp Subject Header1 LOOP1 DAILY Header2 RAW MATERIAL Hourly report lt Host name gt DX Dec 23 23 00 00 Date time lt CH gt 01 Channel no lt Ave gt 0 226 lt Max gt 0 698 lt Min gt 0 972 lt Sum gt 1 537000E 01 lt Unit gt V lt CH gt 02 lt Ave gt 0 225 lt Max gt 0 700 lt Min gt 0 971 Report data System e mail power recoery From DX good co jp Subject DX System_warning To userl good co jp user2 good co jp Date Sat 23 Dec 2000 07 31 58 0900 JST Subject Header1 LOOP1 Header2 RAW MATERIAL Power failure Message lt Host name gt DX lt Power fail gt Dec 23 07 30 12 lt Power on gt Dec 23 07 31 32
19. 32060 Computed data of CH60 lower byte The corresponding registers 32001 to 32016 on the DX102P DX104P DX204P DX208P 32001 to 32024 on the DX106P DX112P 32001 to 32060 on the DX210P DX220P DX230P e These registers are for models with the computation function option M1 e Computed data is a 32 bit signed integer Two registers are assigned per a computed data For the values refer to the computed data in binary format page 6 21 33001 Alarm status of the computed data of CH31 33030 Alarm status of the computed data of CH60 The corresponding registers 33001 to 33008 on the DX102P DX104P DX204P DX208P 33001 to 33012 on the DX106P DX112P 33001 to 33030 on the DX210P DX220P DX230P e These registers are for models with the computation function option M1 Alarm status is a 16 bit unsigned integer For the values refer to the alarm status in binary format page 6 21 The register holds the data in the order as A2A1A4A3 39001 Year 4 digits 39002 Month 39003 Day 39004 Hour 39005 Minute 39006 Second 39007 Millisecond 39008 Summer Winter time Hold register Data 40001 Communication input data of C01 40030 Communication input data of C30 A value in the range from 32768 to 32767 can be written in the hold register For DX100P the hold register is from 40001 to 40012 from C01 to C12 4 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 3 Modbus Error Response Modbus Slave When using the
20. BK pl Set FREE to keys other than MENU key for spuewwog login mode 1 EG 1 FREE FREE LOCK FREE FREE Sets the login mode alarm ACK and removal of Zip disk BM pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Login mode No 1 to 30 p2 Alarm ACK FREE LOCK p3 Removal of Zip disk FREE LOCK BM pl Set FREE to both operations for login mode 1 EG 1 FREE FREE Sets the login mode FUNC key operations etc BF pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator gt pl Login mode No 1 to 30 p2 Batch FREE LOCK p3 Message FREE LOCK p4 Snapshot FREE LOCK p5 Math FREE LOCK p6 Data save FREE LOCK p7 Data load FREE LOCK p8 E mail FREE LOCK p9 Others FREE LOCK BF pl Set FREE to operations other than E mail for login mode 1 BF 1 FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE FREE LOCK FREE IM 04L05A01 17E 5 27 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode 5 6 Control Commands El Syntax Query Example Sets whether or not to use the setting of calibration correction and measuring range EI pl p2 lt terminator gt pl User registration number 1 to 90 p2 whether or not to use the setting of calibration correction and measuring range USE NOT EI pl Allow user 1 to change the calibration correction settings EI 1 USE Description This command can be used on models with the calibration correction option CC1 This command can be used when a user is valid login type is not OFF
21. IM 04L05A01 17E 2 5 Setting the FTP Client Storing the settings To activate the settings made in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings return to the previous values IM 04L05A01 17E eu u JOUJEYTy ey Buisn D 2 5 Setting the FTP Client Procedure DX100P Communication FTP tramsfer file FTP transfer file Disp amp Eve Report Snapshot On For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 3 FTP transfer file DX100P or 2 FTP Client DX200P soft key to display the Communication FTP client menu DX200P Communication FTP client Communication lt FTP client r FIP transfer file nt data orf Disp amp Event data off Report Off Off Snapshot on f FTP connection Primary FTP server nane Port number 21 Login name Password Account Off PASY mode Off Initial path On off Selecting the files to be transferred Selecting whether to transfer the display event data files setup files when settings are changed and setting change log files On Off 4 Pre
22. S 5 38 Esc C Closes the instrument Oo E S 5 38 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 2 A List of Commands Maintenance Test Commands Available when using the maintenance test server function via Ethernet communications Command Function Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function close Disconnects the connection between other devices Yes No 5 38 con Outputs connection information Yes Yes 5 38 eth Outputs Ethernet statistical information Yes Yes 5 39 help Outputs help Yes Yes 5 39 net Outputs network statistical information Yes Yes 5 39 quit Disconnects the connection of the device being operated Yes Yes 5 39 5 7 IM 04L05A01 17E spuewwog po 5 3 Input Range Parameter The following tables show which measurement ranges of the instrument correspond to the input types of the SR command input range setting command VOLT TC RTD DI and SQRT The table also shows the ranges for the upper and lower limits of the span DC Voltage VOLT Square Root SQRT Measurement Parameter for the Value of the Upper and Value of the Upper and Range SR Command Lower Limits of the Span Lower Limits of the SR Upper and Lower Limits Command of the Measurement Range 20 mV 20 mV 20 00 to 20 00 mv 2000 to 2000 60 mv 60 mv 60 00 to 60 00 mv 6000 to 6000 200 mv 200 mv 200 0 to 200 0 mv 2000 to 2000 2 V 2 V 2 000 to 2 000 V 2000 to 2000 6 V 6 V 6 000 to 6 000 V 6000 to 6000 20 V 20 V
23. See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 8 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 4 Checking the Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface Checking the Connection Status Using the Rear Panel The connection status of the Ethernet interface can be confirmed with the indicator that is located to the upper right of the Ethernet connector on the DXP Indicator Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface On green The Ethernet interface is electrically connected Blinking green Transmitting data Off The Ethernet interface is not electrically connected Indicator D Rear Panel Checking the Connection Using the DXP s Screen Checking using the status display of the screen The connection status of the Ethernet interface can be checked using the indicator located on the right hand side of the status display section of the system mode menu For the procedure to display the system mode menu see Entering the System Mode on page vi Indicator Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface On green The Ethernet interface is electrically connected Off The Ethernet interface is not electrically connected Fthemet in a Indicator Checking using the display section located at the upper right corner of the communication log screen The connection status of the Ethernet interface can be checked using the indicator located at the upper right corner of the com
24. and the unit to V SO 31 0N 01 02 100000 150000 4 V This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 For computing equations see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual For parameters p4 and p5 enter a value using 7 digits or less excluding the decimal for negative numbers and 8 digits or less for positive numbers For parameters p4 p5 and p6 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters Description SA Sets the alarm When not using the alarm Syntax SA p1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Alarm number 1 to 4 p3 Alarm ON OFF state OFF Query SA pl p2 Example Set off the alarm number 1 of channel 10 SA 10 1 0FF Description Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 When using the alarm Syntax SA p1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Alarm number 1 to 4 p3 Alarm ON OFF state ON p4 Alarm type Upper limit alarm Lower limit alarm Difference upper limit alarm Difference lower limit alarm Arey Fw Upper limit on rate of change alarm r Lower limit on rate of change alarm T Delay upper limit alarm t Delay lower limit alarm Upper and lower case letters are distinguished p5 Alarm value p6 Relay setting ON Relay settin
25. commands e Queries If there are consecutive sub delimiters they are considered to be single In addition sub delimiters at the front and at the end are ignored Example SR0O1 VOLT SR02 VOLT lt terminator gt is taken to be SRO1 VOLT SRO2 VOLT lt terminator gt Terminator Terminating character Use either of the following two characters for the terminator e CR LF 0DH OAHin ASCII code e LF 0AH in ASCII code Note Do not specify a channel or relay number that is not available on the DXP An error will occur The total data length from the first character to the terminator must be less than 2047 bytes Commands are not case sensitive with the exception of user specified character strings All the commands that are listed using sub delimiters are executed even if one of the commands is erroneous e Spaces that are inserted before and after a parameter are ignored However if spaces are inserted before a command after a sub delimiter or after a query an error occurs The DXP returns a response affirmative negative response to a command that is delimited by a single terminator The controller should follow the one command to one response format When the command response rule is not followed the operation is not guaranteed For the response syntax see chapter 6 Commands dedicated to RS 422A 485 see section 5 8 and instrument information output commands section 2 15 are exceptions 5 2 IM 04L05
26. e When the input range setting SR command is set to SKIP p2 cannot be turned ON e When the computation channel setting SO command is turned OFF p2 cannot be turned ON 5 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode The range of the upper and lower limits of the span scaling upper and lower limits when scaling is enabled is taken to be 100 for parameter p3 Parameter p4 can be set in the range span upper limit 1 to span lower limit 1 If scaling is enabled the range is scaling upper limit 1 to scaling lower limit 1 The decimal position and the number of digits become the same as the span and scaling settings see the SR command This command cannot be specified unless the partial expanded display function p4 of the XU command is set to USE This command cannot be specified if the partial expanded display range does not exist when the span width is set to 1 for example ST Sets the tag Syntax ST pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Tag Up to 16 characters Query ST pl Example Set the tag of channel 02 to TAG2 ST 02 TAG2 Description For the characters that can be used for the tags see appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes Note that semicolons and commas cannot be used Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation functio
27. o 8 8 8 19 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Inout 20 Enter the primary DNS server address in the entry box 2 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 21 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Primary box e Setting the secondary DNS server address Set this value when using the secondary DNS server in the system or the network to which the DXP belongs If this setting is not necessary go to step 24 22 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Secondary box under server search order Server search order Primary a o B Secondary B B B 23 Set the secondary DNS server address using the same method from steps 19 through 21 e Setting the DXP s host name 24 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Host name box Securidal y U U U U Host_name Namain name 25 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box C 26 Enter the DXP s host name in the entry box 27 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Host name box e Setting the domain name to which the DXP belongs 28 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Domain name box Domain name 29 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box ea 30 Enter the DXP s domain name in the entry box 31 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Domain name box e Setting the primary do
28. the command it transmitted until the time for the next command transmission data dropout occurs Take appropriate measures referring to the figures below 1 When slave deice takes time to respond Read cycle Cl E e E E E Slave dei 7 Slave device2 Lo Slave device3 f Data dropout Slave2 and 3 2 When slave device does not respond Read cycle L te Lto Data dropout Slave3 so Slave Pere T Lt tto Timeout time Slave device2 Slave devices O ito LIO Data dropout Slave2 and 3 3 When slave device is disconnected Number of retrials is set to 1 Read cycle Slave ics 1 LO Timeout time Slave device3 7 Slave device2 i Data dropout Slave2 and 3 Y Status lamp G Green Y Yellow R Red Command from the DXP Response from slave device Timeout time F Reia 1 L1e LIO LIO Slave device 2 disconnected Data dropout Slave2 and 3 IM 04L05A01 17E App 9 x pu ddy E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages The list of error codes and messages is given below Errors Related to Parameter Settings e Setting Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section System error Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Incorrect date or time setting See section 5 15 A disabled channel is
29. 11 12 20 00 SCREEN 275 TREND 01 01 02 11 12 21 00 SCREEN BAR 01 01 02 11 12 30 00 KEY UP 01 02 11 12 31 00 KEY RIGHT EN IM 04L05A01 17E 6 15 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data E Mail Log The FL command is used to output the data The log of e mail transmission is output Up to 50 logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest log Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_fffff eee _n_uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 fffff E mail type ALARM Mail at the alarm occurrence release TIME Mail at the scheduled time REPORT Mail at the report creation FAIL Mail at the recovery from the power failure FULL Mail at the memory end TEST Test mail ERROR Error message mail PASSWD User lock occurrence mail eee Error code All space Succeeded __1 to 999 Error code see appendix 6 n Recipient code 1 Recipient 1 2 Recipient 2 Recipient 1 and Recipient 2 uuu u Recipient s e mail address Up to 30 characters d Space Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 ALARM notice 01 05 11 12 30 00 REPORT 375 1 userl user2 EN 6 16 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Alarm Summary The FL command is used to output the data The alarm summary is output Up to 240 alarms are retained Alarms that exceed 240 are cleared from the oldest alarm Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_
30. 24 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Recipient 1 box or the Recipient 2 box Alarm E Hail settings E ai l Recipients Recipient1 Recipient Off 25 Press either the On or Off soft key O Off e Alarm number of which the alarm information is to be transmitted via the e mail message 26 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to one of the Alarm 1 through Alarm 4 boxes Active alarms Alarni Alarm2 Off Alarm3 Off Alarm Off 27 Press either the On or Off soft key On Off ED a e Add instantaneous values 28 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Include instantaneous value DX100P or Include INST DX200P box E Mail Contents Include INST Include source URL Off Subject KDK Alarm_summary Header l Header2 29 Press either the On or Off soft key O Off ee a e Add sender URL Uniform Resource Locator 30 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Include source URL box Include source URL 31 Press either the On or Off soft key On ORS ee IM 04L05A01 17E 2 47 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function e Subject 32 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Subject box Subject DX Alarm_summary 33 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Inout 34 In the box enter the subject 35 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered
31. 45 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Inout 46 Inthe box enter the reference time 47 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Ref Time box e Add instantaneous values 48 Set whether add or not the instantaneous values to the e mail message using the same method as steps 28 and 29 e Add sender URL Uniform Resource Locator 49 Set whether add or not the sender URL to the e mail message using the same method as steps 30 and 31 e Subject 50 Set the subject using the same method from steps 32 through 35 e Header 51 Set the header using the same method from steps 36 through 39 Confirming Canceling the new settings 52 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi System E Mail e Recipient 1 Recipient 2 53 Set the address of the recipient 1 and 2 using the same method as steps 24 and 25 e Add sender URL Uniform Resource Locator 54 Set whether add or not the sender URL to the e mail message using the same method as steps 30 and 31 e Subject 55 Set the subject using the same method from steps 32 through 35 e Header 56 Set the header using the same method from steps 36 through 39 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 49 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission F
32. 6 BB BC BJ CM SY and LO Output commands All commands except CS 5 7 Note Commands that correspond to operations that are restricted for the logged in user cannot be executed The relationship between the commands and the setup items in login mode of a user is indicated below For the setup procedure see section 4 4 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual or the EL BK BM and BF commands Command Setup Item in Login Mode UD DISP ENTER PSO START PS1 STOP AK Alarm ACK EV2 Snapshot EVO EV3 EV4 Save data MS BJ Message TL Computation EM E mail BB BC Batch SY Other LO MENU The CM command can only used by a single specified user see section 2 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 23 eu u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server When logged into the monitor function Group Commands that can be used Ref sections Control commands CC and CM commands 5 6 Output commands All except CS command 5 7 Note The CM command can only used by a single specified user see section 2 6 For a description of the command syntax see chapter 5 for a description of the responses see chapter 6 Main Functions and Commands That Are Used e Output the newest measured computed data Command Function FD Outputs the most recent measured computed data in BINARY or ASCII format When output in BINARY format only the mantissa of the measured computed data is output The correct value
33. 611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode 612 Please acknowledge all active alarms before stopping this record See section 8 12 613 You can t sign this record because of being made by memory time up See sections 1 4 and 1 5 614 Calibration settings are reset because of range setting change See section 5 21 615 Setting changes are aborted while data is saved See section 3 4 1 See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO04L06A01 01E IM 04L05A01 17E App 19 xipueddy E Index A ACCESS CONTMO EAT beersiiwan eine Nand 2 32 access IMOMV A jctve2es ceeedescevectce fens nedeseceunssctensaketsetycerncticncs 2 59 ACCESS reference time 0 0 2 eee eee eteeteeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteeeeeteaees 2 59 access timeout ACCOMM cs eceacs Sdsic cosstard eceyns cadets cate sateteavcavsess Eara ia rE ACOKESS ssi eves ateces sesh viene ee eat affirmative response Alani ACK riranin eere e RaR TAEAE EEEE RRASA NEES EO EL S E E E T i ASCII character code th ASCI OUPUT aici ceili a EE R B barcode INPUT siiras enanas Aase anaE 1 13 oreli elele RO Ad Ol R E A TA 3 16 baud rate ceeee 3 10 4 4 BINARY dat S CTION cccccccccccecessteceeeeeeeessteeeeeeeesesseaees 6 2 BINARY data type 6 3 BINARY footer section 6 2 BINARY header section 6 2 BINARY Output 6 2 Dit SWUGTUTO sscseascceteis dascstecvadiscesvdiacadaiaitid veacaagausacsdadaa
34. BI pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Process type BATCH CONTINUE p2 Whether or not to clears the waveform display when starting measurement ON OFF BI Set BATCH to the process type and clear the waveform display when starting measurement 5 18 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode XT Syntax Query Example Description XS Syntax Query Example Description XM Syntax Query Example Description BI BATCH ON Selects the temperature unit XT pl lt terminator gt pl Temperature unit c Celsius C F Fahrenheit F XT Set the temperature unit to Fahrenheit XT F This command can be used on models with the display language code 2 Sets the channels to display the trend and acquire the data XS pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Enable disable ON OFF displaying the trend and acquiring the data XS pl Enable displaying the trend and acquiring the data on channel 01 XS 01 0N Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 Sets the conditions used to acquire display event data to the internal memory or save the data to the external storage medium XM pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Data type DISPLAY EVENT p2 Sample rate of event data 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 10S 30S 60S 120S
35. C2 or C3 Sets the serial interface YS pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Baud rate 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 p2 Data length 7 8 p3 Parity check NONE ODD EVEN p4 Handshaking OFF OFF XON XON XON RS CS RS p5 RS 422A 485 address 01 to 32 p6 Protocol OFF NORMAL MODBUS MODBUS M BARCODE YS Set the baud rate to 9600 the data length to 8 the parity check to ODD handshaking to OFF OFF the RS 422A 485 address to 02 and the protocol to NORMAL YS 9600 8 O0DD OFF OFF 02 NORMAL This command can be used on models with the serial interface option C2 or C3 YT Syntax Query Example YG Syntax Query Example YL Syntax Query Example YM Sets the files to be transferred using FTP client YT pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Transfer display and event data files Transfer setup file setting change log file ON OFF p2 Transfer report data files ON OFF p3 Transfer screen image data files by snapshot operation ON OFF YT Transfer the display and event data files Do not transfer the report data file and screen image data file YT ON OFF OFF Sets whether or not to use the Web server YO pl lt terminator gt pl Use Not Web server USE NOT YG Use Web server YG USE spuewwog Sets the Modbus master YL pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Read cycle 125MS 250MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S p2 Timeout time 125MS 25
36. DAY WEEK TUE 09 Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 RM Sets the report channel When not using the report channel Syntax RM pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Report channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Use Not use the report channel OFF Query RM pl Example Set the report channel of number 1 to unused RM 01 0FF Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 When using the report channel Syntax RM pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Report channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Use Not use the report channel ON p3 The measurement computation channel number for which to create reports DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 p4 Summation conversion of the waveform on which integration is to be performed OFF no conversion S Convert as though the physical values are integrated in units of seconds MIN Convert as though the physical values are integrated in units of minutes H Convert as though the physical values are integrated in units of hours DAY Convert as though the physical values are integrated in units of days Query RM p1 Example Use the report channel number 1 Set the measurement computation channel number for which to create reports to 01 and the summation conversion of the waveform on which integration is to be performed to 1s RM 01 0N 01 S Descri
37. Enter the primary FTP server name in the entry box Generally the IP address is entered However if DNS is being used the FTP server s host name can also be specified 13 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the FTP server name box e Setting the FTP server s port number 14 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Port number box FTP server nane Port nunber pe laain nama 15 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Inout C 16 Enter the port number of the primary FTP server in the entry box 17 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Port number box e Setting the login name used when accessing the FTP server 18 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Login name box Port number 2 Login nane EA ms Paeeuard 19 Press the Input soft key to display the login name entry box Cc IM 04L05A01 17E 2 13 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 5 Setting the FTP Client 20 Enter the login name that is used when accessing the primary FTP server in the entry box 21 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Login name box e Setting the password used when accessing the FTP server 22 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Password box Login name l Password E Account 23 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Input C 24 Enter the password that is used when ac
38. Input Data Logging In Login Conditions e Users that are registered in the DXP and are allowed to login via communications can log in e Users that are registered in the DXP can log in Up to two users can log in at once e You cannot log in using the same user name If the user is already logged in using the keys on the DXP or if the user is already logged into the setting measurement server maintenance test server or FTP server the user cannot log in e Login is not possible in the following cases Reset the password using the keys on the DXP or the setting measurement server before logging into the FTP server e When the password is set to default e When the password is expired The items that you can operate are the same whether you log in as an administrator or a user Note If the login function is not used no administrators are registered you can login using the user name admin administrator level user or anonymous Password is not required when logging in you can log in regardless of whether a password is entered User Locked If the login operation is carried out with a wrong password for three consecutive times the user is invalidated From that point the user can no longer log in e Clearing the User Locked Condition Administrators can clear the user locked condition For the procedure see section 6 1 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Error Messages If an error occurs during logi
39. Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 4 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function Explanation Selecting the read cycle The cycle at which data is read from other devices Select the read cycle from the following 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 5s 2s 10s Selecting the timeout time If there is no response from the specified slave device after transmitting a command from the DXP over the time specified here timeout time the DXP repeats the operation of sending the command the specified number of retrials see below and waiting If there is no response from the slave device after the specified number of retrials the DXP stops sending commands to the slave device Operation when there is no response from the slave device the number of retrials is set to 2 y Commands are sent to the slave device at the read cycle O The slave device responds X The slave devide does not respond Retrials _ _ _ gt O O X X O O The slave device responds to the retrial Retrials Command sending is stopped o tf gt re O O X X x Select the timeout time from the following 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1 s 2 s 5s 10 s and 1 min Selecting the number of retrials The number of times to retransmit the command when there is no response from the specified slave device If there is no response from the slave device a
40. Set the file header to process sample in the engineering mode 1 Move the cursor to the Header item You can enter the string using the barcode reader also if you open the window for entering strings by pressing the Input soft key 2 Enter BVO process sampleCRLF using the barcode reader process sample is set in the Header box 3 16 IM 04L05A01 17E Chapter 4 Using the Modbus C2 C3 Options 4 1 Modbus Protocol Specifications The Modbus protocol can be used over the serial interface RS 232 or RS 422A 485 The Modbus specifications of the DXP are as follows Specification Description Transmission medium RS 232 or RS 422A 485 Control RS 232 None only Flow control is not available RS 422A 485 None only Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Stop bit 1 bit fixed Parity check Odd Even None Transfer mode RTU Remote Terminal Unit mode only e Data length 8 bits e Data interval time equivalent to 24 bits or less e Error detection Uses CRC 16 Time interval equivalent to 3 5 characters or more is used to detect the end of the message Slave address RS 232 1 to 32 RS 422A 485 1 to 32 The function code of Modbus protocol that are supported by the DXP are as follows Slave The DXP does not support commands that are broadcasted Function Code Function Operation 3 Reading the hold reg
41. Timeout This function drops the connection if no data transfer is detected between the PC and the DXP over a predetermined period of time This applies to data transfer at the application level only see page 1 1 For example this prevents a PC from being connected to the DXP indefinitely which would prohibit other users from making new connections For the configuration required to use this function see section 2 6 Keepalive Extended Function of TCP This function forcibly drops the connection if there are no responses to the test packets that are sent periodically at the TCP level For the configuration required to use this function see section 2 6 You can access the DXP from the PC and retrieve files on the external storage medium of the DXP For a description of how to use the FTP server see section 2 8 Ethernet FTP server IM 04L05A01 17E SUO I JIUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD 3y JO M IM AQ 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface Login To user the FTP server you log in using a user name user ID and password that are registered in the DXP Communication Timeout See Setting Measurement server Keepalive Extended Function of TCP See Setting Measurement server FTP Client For the procedure in using the FTP client see section 2 9 Automatic File Transfer e The display data file event data file and report file can be automatically transferred to a remote FT
42. When pl is MSG 1 to 200 When pl is KEY 1 to 200 When pl is PANEL 1 to 200 When pl is FTPC ERR WEB or EMAIL 1 to 50 Example Output the ten most recent operation error logs FL ERR 10 Description Outputs logs that are saved in the DXP If p2 is omitted all logs saved are output FI Outputs a selected operation log Syntax FI pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Output format 0 Fixed length The user name of the operation log is output using 20 characters If the user name is not 20 characters long spaces are inserted to make the name 20 characters The detailed information of the operation is not output 1 Operation log format Same as the operation log p2 User name up to 20 characters per user 5 36 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 7 Output Commands Example 1 Example 2 Description IS Syntax Example Description FU Syntax Specify multiple user names up to five by delimiting each name with a colon p3 Operations up to 10 characters per operation Specify the operation using the character string that is output in the ASCII output of the operation log using the FL command Specify multiple operations up to five by delimiting each name with a colon p4 Maximum number of output 1 to 10 Output the ten most recent operation logs whose operation is login for user tatsuya and kensuke at fixed length FI 0 tatsuya kensuke login 10 Output the five most recent operation logs whos
43. and response from the DXP Active Connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address p j r 2 2426 T T 2 Ga Sending Commands Dedicated commands for the DXP are used Commands That Can Be Used e When logged into the setting function Parameter Description Ref sections close Disconnects the connection between other devices 5 9 con Outputs connection information eth Outputs Ethernet statistical information help Outputs help net Outputs network statistical information quit Disconnects the connection of the device being operated When logged into the monitor function All commands except the close command can be used Disconnecting from the DXP Logging Out You are logged out in the following cases e Log out by sending a command Send the quit command e Log out according to the communication timeout The connection with a client is automatically dropped if there is no data transmission for 15 minutes e When a communication error occurs When a transmission error reception error or timeout of the keep alive function see Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 occurs you are logged out 2 56 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 15 Using the Instrument Information Server Required Settings Specifications Command Follow the procedures below to use the instrument information server function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface The instrument information server function interprets one U
44. and specify the destination for each item e When Alarm Is Active released Notifies the alarm information e During Recovery from a Power Failure Notifies the time of the power failure and the time of recovery e When Memory End Is Detected See section 1 8 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Notifies the detection of memory end e When an Error Related to the External Storage Medium and FTP Client Occurs Notifies the error code and message in the following cases When an error is detected on the external storage medium or when the data cannot be saved as the free space on the storage medium is insufficient e When data transfer fails using the FTP client function e When a user is locked due to password failure e At the Specified Time Transmits an e mail message when the specified time is reached It can be used to confirm that the e mail transmission including the network is working properly You can specify the reference time and the e mail transmission interval for each destination An example of the e mail transmitted at a specified time From DX yokogawa co jp Date Sat 23 Dec 2000 01 00 09 0900 JST Subject DX Periodic_data _ __ _ Subject To Admin good co jp LOOP1 Header 1 Scheduled Header 2 Periodic data Message lt Host name gt Alarm summary DX Periodic data Power failure lt Time gt Memory full Dec 23 01 00 01 Error User locked Hourly report Daily re
45. drive SY 1 4DISPLAY1 TREND 1 DIGITAL 2 BAR 3 MESSAGE SY Sets the 4 panel display only Description The p4 p6 p8 and p10 parameters are valid for DX200P when p3 p5 p7 and p9 are set to a trend digital or bargraph displays Syntax SY pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 lt terminator gt pl Four screen display number 1 to 4 ME Outputs data saved R the external storage medium Either p porns Sipe E acne ence we Ethernet or serial p3 The display item of the upper left communication can be used quadrant of the divided screen Syntax ME pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt screen 1 pl Operation type TREND Trend display DIR Output the file list DIGITAL Digital display GET Output first time BAR Bar graph display NEXT Output succeeding times OVERVIEW Overview display this parameter is used to Alarm indicator output the remaining data ALARM Alarm summary display when the first output MESSAGE Message summary display operation is not adequate 5 32 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 6 Control Commands RESEND Retransmit the previous output DIRNEXT Outputs the succeeding file list after the file list is output using the DIR command The number of output lists is the p3 value specified with the DIR command If this command is executed after all lists have been output only the free space of the storage medium is output CHCDSK Outputs the free space of the storage medium p2 File name Up to 26 characters Specify with a full path p3 The maximum nu
46. etc used to communicate with other networks The default setting is 0 0 0 0 e Set this value according to the system or the network to which the DXP belongs In some cases this setting may not be necessary DNS Domain Name System You must set the DNS if you are using host names to specify the destination server of the file transfer on an FTP client the server of the e mail recipient or the SNTP server The DNS is a system that correlates the host name domain name to the IP address The host name domain name can be used instead of the IP address when accessing the network The DNS server manages the database that contains the host name domain name and IP address correlation e DNS server Set the address of the DNS server The default setting is 0 0 0 0 Up to two DNS servers can be specified primary and secondary If the primary DNS server is down the secondary server is used to search the host name domain name and IP address Host name Set the DXP s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Domain name Set the network domain name to which the DXP belongs using up to 64 alphanumeric characters When the destination server of the file transfer the server of the e mail recipient or the SNTP server is looked up using the DNS server this domain name is appended to the host name as a possible domain name if it is omitted The destination name server name becomes the FTP server name
47. is not corrected Time Setting When Data Acquisition Is Started Queries the time on a server when data acquisition is started and sets the time information After setting the time data acquisition starts Note ___ e If a response is not received from the SNTP server within 2 seconds after executing the data acquisition start operation the DXP starts data acquisition If a response is received from the server afterwards the time is adjusted according to the time correction operation during data acquisition e You can check the status information to see if the time query to the SNTP server was successful at the time data acquisition was started see section 7 1 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 63 eu u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 17 Using the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Time Setting Using Keys Queries the time on a server at an arbitrary time and sets the time information The procedure below can be carried out when logged in as an administrator e When Data Acquisition Is in Progress If the time deviation between the time of the DXP internal clock and the correct time the specified time is within a specified value the time on the DXP is adjusted gradually Otherwise the time is not corrected For details see section 1 10 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual e When Data Acquisition Is Stopped The time of the DXP internal clock is changed immediately Procedure 1 Press the FUNC key to display the FUNC menu 2 Pre
48. mail log Web operation log setting change log SNTP log e Operator Page When using the login function In addition to the functions on the monitor page the operation of switching the DXP display is possible When not using the login function no administrators are registered In addition to the functions on the monitor page the operation of switching the DXP display ACK operation of individual alarms and write operation of free messages are possible Access Control You can set access control user name and password on each page Refreshes the screen automatically Selects the screen size Auto Refresh J OFF I Zoom a 7 Menu e Refreshes the screen e Displays the alarm summary oi ussite GOS ME 28hour au ee e Displays the measured computed data e Displays logs Select Group gt Select Group gt E Switches screens OA lt Arrow keys and the DISP ENTER key v 11 45 material 2 11 44 material 1 11 44 start IM 04L05A01 17E 1 5 SUO I JIUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD 3y JO M IM AQ 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface E mail Transmission The DXP transmits e mails to the specified destination For a description of how to use the e mail transmission function see section 2 13 Transmitting E mail Messages E mail can be automatically transmitted at the following times You can specify two groups of destinations
49. p3 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Type of operation BEGIN p3 Number of break points OFF 2 to 16 OFF Do not use the calibration correction Description This command is valid when the cal correction setting CC1 option is installed When the input range setting SR command is set to SKIP p3 cannot be set to a value in the range of 2 to 16 e The cal correction setting is turned OFF on the channel in the following cases The input type mode is changed The measurement range is changed Span scale or decimal point position is changed when the input type mode is scaling or square root computation Set the break points for the number of break points Syntax EH pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 5 16 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode p2 Type of operation SET p3 Break point number 1 to 16 p4 Input value p5 Output value Description Set parameters p4 and p5 in the selectable range of values in the range specified for the channel However for channels set to scaling set the value in the range of 30000 to 30000 In addition set the decimal point position to match the notation of the channel e Set p4 so that the value increases as the p3 value increases Confirm the settings Syntax EH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p
50. received buffer falls to 511 bytes the RS signal is set to True CS RS Data transmission control Hardware handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When the CS signal becomes False while sending data to the PC the DXP stops the data transmission When the CS signal becomes True it resumes the data transmission X OFF is treated as data Data reception control Hardware handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When the amount of used space in the received buffer reaches 1537 bytes the RS signal is set to False When the amount of used space in the received buffer falls to 511 bytes the RS signal is set to True Note The PC program must be designed so that the received buffers of both the DXP and the PC do not become full When using XON XON output the data in ASCII format IM 04L05A01 17E 3 3 RS 422A 485 Interface Pin Arrangement Signal Names and the Connection Procedure Pin Arrangement and Signal Names COIN ZN ZN ZN ON NN a z LI L s i e i L O IN AAW 4 TS Z IN A WN A WN Z Rear panel FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA FG Frame Ground Case ground of the DXP SG Signal Ground Signal ground SDB Send Data B Send data B SDA Send Data A Send data A RDB Received Data B Received d
51. setting commands of engineering mode section 5 4 setting commands of system mode section 5 5 and control commands section 5 6 can be used in addition to the commands described above The CM command can only used by a specified user see section 2 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 3 13 suondo 9 Z3 e9e 19 U jenas y Huisn B 3 6 Using the Setting Measurement Function Commands That Can Be Used When Logged into the DXP Users that are registered in the DXP and are allowed to login via communications can log in The following commands can be executed by logging in To log in use the LL command see section 5 6 Group Command Ref Section Control commands FR UD PS AK EV MS TL EM BB BC BQ 5 6 BJ EJ SD SY CL LO and LL Note Only an administrator can execute the commands below FR BQ SD and CL commands Commands that correspond to operations that are restricted for the logged in user cannot be executed The relationship between the commands and the setup items in login mode of a user is indicated below For the setup procedure see section 4 4 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Command Setup Item in Login Mode UD DISP ENTER PSO START PS1 STOP AK Alarm ACK EV2 Snapshot EVO EV3 EV4 Save data MS BJ Message TL Computation EM E mail BB BC Batch SY Other LO MENU Disconnecting the RS 422A 485 Connection The connection is dropped in the following cases e When a comman
52. string value is set in the Subject box e Header 36 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to either the Header 1 box or the Header 2 box Header E Header2 37 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box _ Input gt 38 Inthe box enter the character strings 39 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Header box Confirming Canceling the new settings 40 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi e Scheduled E Mail e Recipient 1 Recipient 2 41 Set the address of the recipient 1 and 2 using the same method as steps 24 and 25 Scheduled E Mail settings E Hail Recipients and Transmission time Recipientl Recipient2 Off Interval 24h Interval 24h Ref time 00 68 e Interval 42 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Interval box Recipientl Off Recipient2 Off Interval 24h Interval 24h 43 Press one of the soft keys from 1h to 24h to select the interval lh 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h Next 1 2 a M MM MlM 2 48 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function e Ref Time 44 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Ref Time box Recipient1 Off Recipient2 Off Interval 24h Interval 24h Ref time 00 68 Ref time 00 08
53. that have been changed are displayed in yellow Ethernet The boxes containing parameters IP address 1 6 0 0 that have been changed are Subnet mask o 0 0 0 displayed in yellow The boxes containing parameters that have not been changed are displayed in white Set other parameters as well according to steps 2 and 3 Confirming Canceling the new changes The operation is different when you are confirming or canceling the new changes parameter boxes in yellow See below When confirming the new changes Press the DISP ENTER key The new changes are confirmed and the yellow parameter boxes change to white The cursor returns to the parameter at the upper left portion of the screen the first parameter on the screen However if the new change is not valid then the parameter box turns red Ethernet IP address 1 B B 8 Parameters for which the new Subnet mask b B B changes that are not valid are displayed in red When canceling the new changes 1 Press the ESC key A window appears for you to confirm the cancellation Selecting YES and pressing the DISP ENTER key cancels the new settings and the screen returns to the previous screen Selecting No and pressing the DISP ENTER key does not cancel the new settings and the screen returns to the original screen IM 04L05A01 17E vii Names and Uses of Parts Storing the new settings To activate the new settings in the system mode the settin
54. the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 5 Control DX100P or 3 Control Login Timeout DX200P soft key to display the Communication Control Login Time out menu DX100P Communication Control DX200P Communication Control Login Time out Communication Control Time out Keep alive Control A A Application time out Application time out aa On Off aa Time 1 nmi Keep alive On i bad Communication input r Keep alive Available user Off On Off tn rConmunication input Available user Admin On Off on Off Setting the communication timeout e Enabling Disabling communication timeout On Off 4 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the On Off box under communication timeout Application time out On Off ot 5 Press either the On or Off soft key If you select On go to step 6 If you select Off go to step 10 ee a e Setting the communication timeout time 6 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Time box Application time out On Off On Time EE nin 7 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Input 8 In the box enter the communication timeout time 9 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Time box
55. the order upper 16 bits followed by the lower 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the higher register number in this case in Register e UINT32_L Specify this parameter when a 32 bit unsigned integer is assigned to the Modbus register in the order lower 16 bits followed by the upper 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the lower register number in this case in Register e FLOAT_B Specify this parameter when a 32 bit floating point data is assigned to the Modbus register in the order upper 16 bits followed by the lower 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the higher register number in this case in Register e FLOAT_L Specify this parameter when a 32 bit floating point data is assigned to the Modbus register in the order lower 16 bits followed by the upper 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the lower register number in this case in Register Setting Example If you set as shown in the figure below the DXP reads an INT16 value from register 30001 to put it to C01 and an INT16 value from register 30002 to C02 Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 Pon foo 7 om ame 1 oom inte Displaying the read data The data that is read can be displayed by writing a computing equation using C01 through C30 C01 to C12 for DX100P on a computation channel M1 option The decimal position and the unit are specified by the slave device Convert the read value
56. the span For the alarm value of p5 enter a value using 5 digits or less excluding the decimal For computation channels enter a value using 8 digits or less excluding the decimal An error occurs if a number of a relay that is not installed is specified in p7 For the procedures used to set the relay numbers see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 For computation channels the alarm types that can be specified are only H upper limit alarm L lower limit alarm T delay upper limit alarm and t delay lower limit alarm Use the XA command to set the alarm hysteresis However for computation channels the alarm hysteresis is fixed to zero SW Sets the display update rate auto save interval Syntax SW pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Display update rate 15s 30s 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 4H 10H p2 Auto save interval 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 1DAY 2DAY 3DAY 5DAY 7DAY 10DAY 14DAY 31DAY Query SW Example Set the display update rate to one minute and the auto save interval to 10 minutes SW 1MIN 10MIN Description SZ Syntax Query Example Description SP Syntax Query Example Description e The selectable auto save interval p2 varies depending on the display update rate p1 setting For det
57. to a value with an appropriate unit using the computation equation see an example below For information on the use of the computation channel see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E Example Assigns the communication input data C01 to the computation channel 31 Read an INT16 value from register 30001 of the slave device with the address 1 to put it to the communication input data C01 of the DXP Change the value to have two digits of decimal fraction multiply 0 01 and a unit V Command First communication data 01 Address 1 Register 30001 Type INT16 e Computation channel Computation equation for Channel 31 C01 K01 Unit V Constant KO1 0 01 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 9 suondo 9 Z9 snqpow y Buisn a 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO04L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 7 Modbus master BASIC or 4 Modbus Master soft key to display the Modbus master BASIC menu DX100P Modbus master BASIC menu DX200P Modbus master menu Connunication Modbus naster Basi
58. transmission is stopped the communication input data turns to be an error data In this case computation channels display xxxxxxx IM 04L05A01 17E 4 13 suondo 9 Z9 snqpow y Buisn a 4 6 Checking the Operating Status of the Modbus Master Function Data dropout Data dropout occurs when commands 1 through 8 cannot be completed in a read cycle see appendix 5 The communication input data Cxx is held at the previous value Take measures such as making the read cycle longer or reducing the number of commands Procedure Displaying the MODBUS STATUS screen 1 Press the FUNC key The FUNC menu appears The structure of the FUNC menu varies depending on the basic settings and options 2 Press the Modbus master soft key The Modbus status screen appears Modbus master Data dropout When a data dropout occurs the message Data dropout is displayed on the MODBUS STATUS screen aon Press the right arrow key to clear the message Resuming command transmission to the slave device to which command transmission is stopped due to timeout 1 Using the up and down arrow keys select the command corresponding to the slave device to which transmission will be resumed Comm Data Slave No Status First Last Address Registers 1 Good CH Cl amp 2 30881 2 Good C2 22 lt 2 30882 m 3 None CH CO 4 3 38881 4 5 A message Push right arrow key to refresh appears pees
59. up to 20 characters p4 Password arbitrary characters p5 Password expiration time OFF 1Month 3Month 6Month p6 Login mode number 1 to 30 Query EL pl Only an administrator can use the query Example Set login method user name user ID password expiration time and login mode number to KEY ope2 7777 a months and 4 respectively for user 2 EG 2 KEY ope2 1Month 4 Description This command can be used when at least an administrator is registered e You cannot specify quit as a user name A space or spaces are not allowed If this command is executed the password is reset to its default The response to query command is 1 Valid password Invalidated password Parameters p3 to p7 are valid when p2 is not OFF BW Syntax Query Example BK Syntax Query Example BM Syntax Query Example BF Syntax Query Example Sets the login mode sign authority level BW pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Login mode number 1 to 30 p2 Sign authority level OFF SIGNATURE1 SIGNATURE2 SIGNATURE3 BW pl Set the sign authority level for the login mode 1 to SIGNATURE1 BW 1 SIGNATURE1 Sets the login mode key operations BK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Login mode No 1 to 30 p2 START key FREE LOCK p3 STOP key FREE LOCK p4 MENU key FREE LOCK p5 USER key FREE LOCK p6 DISP ENTER key FREE LOCK
60. upper 16 bits and 30004 LP2 lower 16 bits in slave device address M A i ed ed A When setting the system mail number is 5 to the communication input Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt data channel C02 ss Be gee ree eee pl Type SYSTEM YM 2 0N C02 C02 5 30003 INT32_B p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF 3 Recipient 2 ON OFF YU Sets the contents of the e mail p R S p4 URL of the DXP ON OFF When setting the alarm mail pS us bject Up to 32 characters Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 p11 p12 p6 Header 1 Up to 64 characters lt terminator gt p7 Header 2 Up to 64 characters pl Type ALARM G ry YU p1 pa Reciprent E ON OPR Example Send system mails to the recipient 1 with ps Recipient 2 ON OFE the URL of the DXP attached Set the p4 Alarm No 1 ON OFF subject and the header 1 to SystemAlart g5 Alarm No2 ON OFF and LP2 respectively Don aA arm NOSON SORE YU SYSTEM ON OFF ON SystemAlart LP2 p7 Alarm No 4 ON OFF p8 Instantaneous values ON OFF When setting the report mail p9 URL of the DXP ON OFF Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl0 Subject Up to 32 characters pl Type REPORT pll Header 1 Up to 64 characters p2 Recipient 1 ON OFF pl2 Header 2 Up to 64 characters p3 Recipient 2 ON OFF Query YU pl p4 URL of the DXP ON OFF Example Send alarm mails from alarm no 1 to 4 p5 Subject Up to 32 characters to the recipient 1 Attach the p6 Header 1 Up to 64 ch
61. user ID and password 451 Login prohibited because another user is logged in There is a user with the same user name already logged into the setting measurement server maintenance test server or FTP server Or there is a user logged in using keys on the DXP administrator or user when attempting to log into the setting function of the setting measurement server Check the login status IM 04L05A01 17E App 7 xipueddy E Appendix 4 Login Process and Messages during the Login Process When Not Using the Login Function of the DXP Log in using setting o o admin monitor or user for the function name If you use setting or admin you log into the setting function e If you use monitor or user you log into the monitor function Disconnect communications Disconnect communications Ee Disconnect communications No No Connect communications Within the number of connections Function name Entered quit Verification match Within the number of simultaneous uses 3 Login complete Yes No Increment retry count No Within hree retries No Within three retries For a description of error messages see the previous page App 8 IM 04L05A01 17E Appenaix 5 Data Dropout Modbus Master If the DXP does not have received the response from the slave device corresponding to
62. using the normal protocol see chapter 4 The PC reads the measured computed data and alarm status on the DXP The PC writes data to the communication input data or reads the communication input data on the DXP Modbus master device J ITZ Read the measured computed data alarm status Ki S and the communication input data NS Serial communications Write data to the communication input data Modbus slave device Modbus Master For a description of how to use the communication function using the normal protocol see chapter 4 The DXP loads the measured data of other instruments The loaded data can be handled as communication input data of the computation function M1 option on the computation channel e Function for writing data to other instruments is not supported Modbus master device Serial communications Hs He e O Modbus slave device 1 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 1 2 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Serial Interface Barcode Input You can control the DXP by reading barcodes instead of using the front panel keys For the operating procedure see section 3 7 A barcode reader is required Bar code reader Bar code BJt1 B t hS t You can enter character strings when a character input window is shown on the DXP screen You can set batch numbers lot numbers and batch comments You can write arbitrary m
63. 0 SI 31 0N 1MIN 20 Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 SJ Sets the TLOG timer Syntax SJ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Computation channel number DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 p2 Timer 1 to 3 p3 Conversion of the time unit for TLOG IM 04L05A01 17E 5 15 spuewwog 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode SUM computation OFF No conversion S Convert to a physical amount in unit of seconds that are integrated MIN Convert to a physical amount in unit of minutes that are integrated H Convert to a physical amount in unit of hours that are integrated Query SJ pl Example Set timer 1 to computation channel number 31 No conversion of time unit SJ 31 1 Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 About p3 In the sum computation sampled data are summed over the scan interval However when a physical value is measured over a period of time the actual value may not match the computed result This is due to the fact that the scan interval and the time unit are different In these cases set p3 to the same unit as the time unit of the physical value The summed value is calculated according to the following converting equation depending on the parameter OFF measured value S measured value x scan interval MIN measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR measured value x scan inter
64. 0 are cleared from the oldest log Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_nnn_xxxxxxxxx_k_ffffffff_eeeCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 nnn Error number __1 to 999 see appendix 6 XXXXXXXXX Detailed code 9 characters k Server type FTP destination P Primary S Secondary ffffffff File name 8 characters eee Extension 3 characters Space Example EA 99 07 26 10 00 00 P 72610000 99 07 27 10 00 00 P 72710000 99 07 28 10 00 00 123 HOSTADDR P 72810000 99 07 29 10 00 00 123 HOSTADDR P 72910000 EN The FL command is used to output the data DDR DDR DDR DDR e The operation error log is output Up to 50 operation error logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest log Other communication messages 400 to 999 and status messages 500 to 599 are not output Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_nnn_uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 6 10 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Operation Log ss nnn uuu Example EA Second 00 to 59 Error code __1 to 999 see appendix 6 Error message Up to 80 characters Space 99 05 11 12 20 00 210 Media has not been inserted 99 05 11 12 30 00 217 Unknown file type EN The FL command is used to output t
65. 04L05A01 17E 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode 30000 to 30000 p7 Scaling upper limit 30000 to 30000 p8 Scaling decimal position 0 to 4 p9 Unit Up to 6 characters Query SR pl Example Convert the DC voltage measured on channel 01 to the amount of flow using the square root computation Set the measurement range to 6 V span lower limit to 1 V span upper limit to 5 V scaling lower limit to 10 0 m s and scaling upper limit to 100 0 m s SR 01 SQRT 6V 1000 5000 100 1000 1 m3 S Set parameters p3 p4 and p5 according to the table in section 5 3 For parameters p4 and p5 enter a value using 5 digits or less excluding the decimal The decimal position is fixed to the position indicated in the table in section 5 3 For parameters p6 p7 and p8 either set all Description three parameters or omit all three parameters SO Sets the computing equation Syntax SO pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Computation channel number DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 p2 Turn ON OFF computation p3 Computing equation Up to 40 characters p4 Lower limit of span 9999999 to 99999999 p5 Upper limit of span 9999999 to 99999999 p6 Decimal position of span 0 to 4 p7 Unit Up to 6 characters Query SO pl Example Set the computation channel to 31 the computation to ON the computing equation to the sum of channel 01 and 02 span lower limit to 10 0000 span upper limit to 15 0000
66. 0MS 500MS 1S 2S 5S 10S 1MIN p3 Number of retrials OFF 1 2 3 4 5 10 20 YL Set the read cycle to 500MS timeout time to 250MS and number of retrials to 2 Y1 500MS 250MS 2 Sets the commands for Modbus master When the command is not used Syntax Query Example YM pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 8 p2 Command ON OFF OFF YM pl Set the command registration number 1 to OFF YM 1 OFF When the command is used Syntax YS pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Registration number 1 to 8 p2 Command ON OFF ON p3 First channel number DX100P C01 to C12 DX200P C01 to C30 p4 Last channel number DX100P C01 to C12 DX200P C01 to C30 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 23 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode p5 Slave device address number 1 to 247 p6 Register number 30001 to 39999 40001 to 49999 300001 to 365535 400001 to 465535 p7 Data type INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT _B Query Example p10 Subject Up to 32 characters p11 Header 1 Up to 64 characters p12 Header 2 Up to 64 characters YU p1 Send scheduled mails to the recipient 1 at 17 15 everyday Do not attach the instantaneous values Attach the URL FLOAT_L Set the subject and the header 1 to Query YM p1 GOOD and LP2 respectively Example Take a 32 bit signed integer assigned to YU TIME ON 24H 17 15 OFF OFF ON GOOD registers 30003
67. 1 402 Select function from setting or monitor To log into the setting function enter setting To log into the monitor function enter monitor The DXP returns the following message E1 400 Input username Enter the user name The DXP returns the following message E1 405 Input user ID Enter the user ID The DXP returns the following message E1 401 Input password Enter the password The DXP returns the following message EO You are logged in If the password has expired you are requested to set a new password The DXP returns the following message E1 407 Password has expired Please enter a new password Enter a new password The DXP returns the following message E1 408 Enter password again for confirmation Enter the password you entered in step 6 The DXP returns the following message EO You are logged in 2 22 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server Sending Commands Dedicated commands for the DXP are used Commands That Can Be Used e When logged into the setting function as an administrator Group Commands that can be used Ref sections Setting commands engineering mode All 5 4 Setting commands system mode All 5 5 Control commands All except BV BP and KE commands 5 6 Output commands All except CS command 5 7 Note The commands below can be executed even when data acquisition is in progress
68. 1 to 365535 Hold register 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 Type Specify the type of data that is assigned to the Modbus register of the slave device the DXP reads all data as floating point data e INT16 Specify this parameter when a 16 bit signed integer is assigned to the Modbus register Communication input Modbus data of the DXP register Cxx 16 bit signed integer e UINT16 Specify this parameter when a 16 bit unsigned integer is assigned to the Modbus register e INT32_B Specify this parameter when a 32 bit signed integer is assigned to the Modbus register in the order upper 16 bits followed by the lower 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the higher register number in this case in Register Communication input Modbus data of the DXP register Cxx ee a 32 bit signed integer Lower 16 bits e INT32_L Specify this parameter when a 32 bit signed integer is assigned to the Modbus register in the order lower 16 bits followed by the upper 16 bits Specify the smaller register number the lower register number in this case in Register Communication input Modbus data of the DXP register Cxx Lower 16 bits __ 32 bit signed integer Upper 16 bits 4 8 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function e UINT32_B Specify this parameter when a 32 bit unsigned integer is assigned to the Modbus register in
69. 1Month 3Month 6Month EK pl Only an administrator can use the query Set login method user name and password expiration time to KEY EFG and a month respectively for administrator 2 EG 2 KEY EFG 1Month Description You cannot specify quit as a user name A space or spaces are not allowed e If this command is executed the password is reset to its default The response to query command is r Valid password Invalidated password 5 26 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode EL Sets users When using the user ID Syntax EL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Registration No 1 to 90 p2 Login method OFF Disabled KEY Key operation COM via Ethernet KEY COM Key operation and via Ethernet p3 User name up to 20 characters p4 User ID up to 8 characters p5 Password arbitrary characters p6 Password expiration time OFF 1Month 3Month 6Month p7 Login mode number 1 to 30 Query EL p1 Only an administrator can use the query Example Set login method user name user ID password expiration time and login mode number to KEY COM opel 7777 3 months and 3 respectively for user 1 EL 1 KEY COM opel 7777 3Month 3 When not using the user ID Syntax EG pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Registration No 1 to 90 p2 Login method OFF Disabled KEY Key operation COM via Ethernet KEY COM Key operation and via Ethernet p3 User name
70. 2 Press the right arrow key to start command transmission to the specified slave device 4 14 IM 04L05A01 17E Chapter 5 Commands 5 1 Command Syntax Command Syntax The syntax of the engineering mode setting system mode setting control output commands see sections 5 4 to 5 7 of the instrument is given below ASCII codes are used for the character codes For the syntax of the maintenance test commands see section 5 9 and instrument information output commands see section 2 15 see the corresponding sections or the examples for each command amen H ate Sub delimiter Terminator Command example SR 02 SKIP SR 03 VOLT 2V 1500 1800 Parameter 02 SKIP 1800 Delimiter Command name SR Sub delimiter Command name Defined using two alphabet characters Parameter Command parameters Set using alphabet characters or numerical values Parameters are separated by delimiters When the parameter is a numerical value the valid range varies depending on the command Spaces before and after of the parameter are ignored except for parameters that are specified using an ASCII character string unit when spaces are valid You can omit the parameters that do not need to be changed from their current settings However delimiters cannot be omitted Example SR 01 lt a rminator gt If multiple parameters are omitted and delimiter
71. 2 Up to 64 characters YN Use the DNS server at 192 168 0 1 YN 192 168 0 1 Sets the communication timeout When not using the timeout Syntax Query Example YQ pl lt terminator gt pl Enable Disable communication timeout OFF YQ Disable timeout YQ OFF When using the timeout Syntax YQ pl p2 lt terminator gt 5 22 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode Query Example EQ Syntax Query Example Description YS Syntax Query Example Description pl Enable Disable communication timeout ON p2 Timeout time 1 to 120 minutes YQ Enable communication timeout and set the timeout period to 3 min YQ ON 3 Sets the user that can use the communication input data EQ pl lt terminator gt pl User that can use the communication input data OFF No user can use the communication input data Adminl to 3 Administrators on the Ethernet communications Userl to 30 Users on the Ethernet communications Serial User on the serial communications EQ Set the administrator 1 as the user that can use the communication input data EQ Adminl This command can specify a single user e f no administrators are registered specifying any user from Admin1 to User30 is equivalent to specifying the user connected to the setting measurement server using the Setting function e Serial is valid on products with serial communications option
72. 2 Type of operation END Query EH pl EH is not specified The confirmed settings are output to the query command Example Set the calibration correction with the three break points to Channel 2 No of B P Inpur value Output Value 1 0 1 2 50 49 3 100 101 EH 2 BEGIN 3 EH 2 SET 1 0 1 EH 2 SET 2 50 49 EH 2 SET 3 100 101 EH 2 END RD Sets whether to use DST Syntax RD pl lt terminator gt pl Use Not use DST USE NOT Query RD Example Use DST RD USE RT Sets the DST start end time Syntax RT pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt pl DST start month 1 to 12 p2 The number of the week in the month in which the DST start day falls 1 to 4 LAST p3 Day of the week when DST starts SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p4 DST start hour 0 to 23 p5 DST end month 1 to 12 p6 The number of the week in the month in which the DST end day falls 1 to 4 LAST p7 Day of the week when DST ends SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p8 DST end hour 0 to 23 Query RT Example Set the DST start time to 0 hour on the 2nd Sunday in June and the DST end time to 0 hour on the 2nd Sunday in December RT 6 2 SUN 0 12 2 SUN 0 Description The start time and end time cannot be set to the same value IM 04L05A01 17E 5 17 spuewwog 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode XA Sets alarm related settings Syntax XA pl p2 p3 p4 p5
73. 3 p2 Timer type ABSOLUTE p3 Interval 1MIN 2MIN 3MIN 4MIN 5MIN 6MIN 10MIN 12MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H p4 Reference Time hh fixed form hh Hour 00 to 23 p5 Reset not reset the integrated value when the timer expires ON OFF p6 Action to take when the timer expires OFF DATA SAVE Query XQ pl Example Set an absolute timer to timer number 1 Set the sampling interval to 30 minutes the reference time to 7 O clock reset the integrated value when the timer expires and set no action when the timer expires XQ Description When using Syntax XQ p1 p2 1 ABSOLUTE 30MIN 07 0N OFF This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 The timer expires at the interval specified by parameter 3 from the time specified by p4 and performs the operation set with parameters p5 and p6 the relative timer pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt Timer number 1 to 3 Timer type RELATIVE Query Example Description RO Syntax Query Example p3 p4 p5 XQ Set Set Interval hh mm fixed form hh Hour 00 to 24 mm Minute 00 to 59 Set in the range 00 01 to 24 00 Reset not reset the integrated value when the timer expires ON OFF Action to take when the timer expires OFF DATA SAVE p1 a relative timer to timer number 1 the sampling interval to 1 hour 15 minutes reset the integrated value when the t
74. 300S 600S p3 Event data length 3MIN 5MIN 10MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H 2H 3H 4H 6H 8H 12H 1DAY 2DAY 3DAY 5DAY 7DAY 10DAY 14DAY 31DAY XM Set the data types to event data the sample rate to 10 s and the event data length to 30 minutes XM EVENT 10S 30MIN Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 is set to EVENT e Parameter p2 can be set to 125MS 250MS or 500MS on models DX102P DX104P DX204P or DX208P XU Syntax Query Example Description XR Syntax e The event data length selection p3 varies depending on the p2 setting and the number of channels that are measuring and computing For details see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual When the application setting BI command is Batch the data length is fixed to an available maximum value parameter p3 cannot be set arbitrarily Sets the channel identification display memory alarm time language whether or not to use the partial expanded display function and the Remote Controller ID XU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl The display used to identify the measurement computation channels TAG CHANNEL p2 Memory alarm time 1H 2H 5H 10H 20H 50H 100H p3 Language ENGLISH JAPANESE GERMAN FRENCH p4 Use Not use partial expanded display function USE NOT p5 Remote controller ID 0 to 31 XU Set the display used to identify the measurement computation channels to channel numbers the memory alarm length to 1 h
75. 32 interface Manufacturer Symbol Technologies Inc As the number of characters that can be assigned to the header is relatively small you may have some restrictions on the usage for some DXP applications Procedure Some examples using barcodes is used to explain the procedure Note ____ The CRLF used in this section denotes a terminator For details on terminator see page 5 2 Example 1 Logging in using a user name ABC2001 and user ID 5555 While logged out enter the command BP2 ABC2001 5555CRLF in the barcode reader The user name and user ID are entered and the password input window appears the password is entered using the keys Note Commands can be entered collectively or in divided segments when using barcodes Commands can be divided at an arbitrary point For example you can enter the following sequence of command segments for example 1 BP2 ABC2001 5555 CRLF Fora barcode reader equipped with a function that automatically attaches the header and footer to the command before transmission you can set BP2 for the header CRLF for the footer and enter ABC2001 5555 Example 2 Set the batch number to Process1 lot number to 0031 and wait for start With the measurement stopped enter the command BBProcess1 0031 KESTARTCRLF using the barcode reader The batch number and lot number are set and the start window appears Example 3
76. 4 4 117 This password is not effective See section 6 1 118 You are logged out because of invalid access Register the user again See section 4 4 119 This user name is unable to use this mode Use other user name to log in See section 4 4 120 Measured value is incorrect in ascending order See section 5 21 121 A user is already logged in See section 1 5 122 Measured value exceeds the range setting See section 5 21 123 Measure function cannot be used until range settings are stored See section 5 21 124 Password entry cannot be performed Errors when entering characters using barcode Section 3 7 125 Character entry cannot be performed Errors when entering characters using barcode Section 3 7 e Execution Errors Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress Execute Memory Stop if the action is necessary 151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating Execute Memory Stop or stop computation if the action is necessary 152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress Wait till the saving ends 153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress 2 155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped Messages can be written after Memory Start 157 This function is not possible at this time 158 Exceeds time deviation setting Set a time within the devi
77. 4 DJT dt 5 E uUj s eju 6 amp Fi Viffv 7 G W giw 8 H X h x 9 IiJy ily A ILF i J Zij fz B ESC K k Cc L l D CR M m E N 2 n F 0 o IM 04L05A01 17E App 1 xipueddy Ey Appendix 2 Output Flow of FIFO Data Overview of the FIFO Buffer The DXP has a dedicated buffer for outputting measured computed data Measured computed data are constantly acquired to the buffer at the specified interval the acquiring interval to the FIFO buffer specified by the FR command The oldest data are overwritten by the newest data First In First Out By using this function it is possible to read measured computed data that have been sampled at the specified intervals regardless of the frequency at which the PC periodically reads the measured computed data The following example shows the case when the acquiring interval to the FIFO buffer is 1 s and the capacity of the FIFO buffer is for 8 intervals m Block1 2 3 Previous read lt 4 position RP1 5 Current read lt 6 lt Most recent acquire position RP2 position WP 7 Blocks e Acquiring the measured computed data e The measured computed data are acquired to the buffer at 1 s intervals e Measured computed data are acquired to blocks 1 through 8 in order After acquiring to block 8 the next acquiring operation returns to block 1
78. 5 9 Maintenance Test Commands 5 8 RS 422A 485 Dedicated Commands ESCO Opens the instrument The ASCII code of ESC is 1BH See appendix 1 Syntax ESC 0 pl lt terminator gt pl Instrument s address 01 to 32 Example Open the instrument at address 01 and enable all commands ESC o 01 Description Specifies the address of the device with which to communicate Only one instrument can be opened at any given time When an instrument is opened with the ESC O command any other instrument that is currently open is automatically closed When this command is received correctly the DXP transmits the data ESC o _ _ e Normally either CR LF or LF can be used as terminators for communication commands However the terminator for this command must be CR LF ESC C Closes the instrument The ASCII code of ESC is 1BH See appendix 1 Syntax ESC c pl lt terminator gt pl Instrument s address 01 to 32 Example Close the instrument with the address 01 ESC c 01 Description Clears the current connection with the instrument When this command is received correctly the DXP transmits the data ESC c J e Normally either CR LF or LF can be used as terminators for communication commands However the terminator for this command must be CR LF 5 9 Maintenance Test Commands close Disconnects the connection between other devices Syntax close p1 p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Port on the DXP side 0 t
79. 59 Query XG Example Set the offset time to 9 hours lead XG 0900 XP Sets the data and time for the memory timeup When the memory timeup is set to none Syntax XP pl lt terminator gt pl Timeup type OFF Query XP Example Set the memory timeup to none IM 04L05A01 17E 5 21 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode XP OFF When the timeup type is set to HOUR Syntax XP pl lt terminator gt pl Timeup type HOUR p2 Date of timeup dd fixed form dd Day 01 to 28 p3 Time of timeup hh fixed form hh hour 00 to 23 Query XP Example The memory timeup occurs every hour on the hour XP HOUR When the timeup type is set to DAY or MONTH Syntax XP pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Timeup type DAY MONTH p2 Date of timeup dd fixed form dd Day 01 to 28 p3 Time of timeup hh fixed form hh hour 00 to 23 Query XP Example The memory timeup occurs at 9 o clock everyday Parameter p2 is invalid in this example XP DAY 05 09 When the timeup type is set to WEEK Syntax XP pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Timeup type WEEK p2 Day of timeup SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT p3 Time of timeup hh fixed form hh hour 00 to 23 Query XP Example The memory timeup occurs at 9 o clock every Tuesday XP WEEK TUE 09 BR Sets the system relays Syntax BR pl p2 lt terminator gt pl System relay number 1 2 p2 Action FAIL Outputs CPU failure MemoryEnd Outputs memory end alarm Batch
80. 6 Using the Setting Measurement Function Connecting to the Function Carry out the steps according to the PC software and network environment that you are using For RS 232 Connect the DXP and the PC The DXP is ready to receive commands For RS 422A 485 After connecting the DXP and the PC open the DXP using the open command ESC o The DXP is ready to receive commands Connectable Functions Commands output commands of the monitor function and commands a portion of the control commands of the setting function can be used Communication Log The commands and responses are recorded in the communication log Sending Commands to the DXP Commands That Can Be Used without Logging into the DXP Group Parameter Description Ref sections Control commands 5 6 CM Sets the communication input data Output commands control 5 7 BO Sets the output byte order IF Sets the status filter CS Sets the checksum Output commands Setup measured and computed data output 5 7 FC Outputs screen image data FE Outputs setup data FD Outputs the most recent measured computed data FF Outputs FIFO data FL Outputs logs alarm summary and message summary FI Outputs a selected operation log IS Outputs status information FU Outputs user level RS 422A 485 dedicated commands 5 8 Esc o Opens the instrument Esc c Closes the instrument Note e Ifthe login function is not used the PC connects to the setting function of the DXP In this case
81. A ssal SD A RD O A E cin SD B RD O B RD A TD O RD B TD O SG SHIELD ao in Converter n lt 31 Do not connect terminator to 1 to n 1 Note The method used to eliminate noise varies depending on the situation In the connection example only the cable shield on the DXP side is connected to ground one sided grounding This is effective when there is a difference in the electric potential between the PC s ground and the DXP s ground This may be the case for long distance communications If there is no difference in the electric potential between the PC and the DXP two sided grounding in which the PC side is also grounded may be effective Furthermore using two sided grounding and connecting a serial capacitance on one side may be effective Consider these possibilities to eliminate noise When using the two wire type interface Modbus protocol the 485 driver must be set to high impedance within 3 5 characters after the last data byte is sent by the host computer IM 04L05A01 17E 3 7 suondo 9 ZD 89e 19 U jenas y Huisy B 3 3 RS 422A 485 Interface Pin Arrangement Signal Names and the Connection Procedure A Serial Interface Converter Recommended converter MODEL RC 57 by RA SYSTEMS CORP or Z 101HE by Sharp CAUTION Some converters not recommended by Yokogawa have FG and SG pins that are not isolated In this case do not connect anything to the FG and
82. A01 17E 5 2 A List of Commands The DXP has the following four modes Syntax error will occur if you attempt to execute a command in the wrong mode Query commands can be executed regardless of the mode Mode Description Sign used in the table Log out No user logs in LO Operation mode Mode in which measurement is performed O Engineering mode Mode in which measurement range and other E parameters are specified System mode Mode in which basic information is specified S Setting Commands Engineering Mode These commands can be specified when the DXP is in the engineering mode In order to activate the settings that are changed using the commands the settings must be saved using the BE command Otherwise new settings will not be activated The settings that are returned in response to a query in the engineering mode will S contain the new settings even if they are not saved with the BE command 3 However the new settings will not be activated until they are saved 3 Command Function Execution Setting Monitor Page g Name Mode Function Function SR Sets the input range E Yes No 5 10 so Sets the computing equation E Yes No 5 11 SA Sets the alarm E Yes No 5 11 sw Sets the display update rate auto save interval E Yes No 5 12 SZ Sets the zone E Yes No 5 12 SP Sets the partial expanded display E Yes No 5 12 ST Sets the tag E Yes No 5 13 SX Sets the group E Yes No 5 13 SL Sets the trip line E Yes No 5 13 S
83. ASV commands SCAN Failed to read the transfer connection settings Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server 284 FTP transfer setting error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284 Character String and Details MODE Internal processing error gt LOCAL 3 Internal processing error g REMOTE Q Fed The destination file name is not correct Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files ABORT File transfer abort was requested by the server Check the server for the reason for the abort request 1 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer IM 04L05A01 17E App 15 Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Code Message 285 FTP data connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285 Character String and Details SOCKET Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection BIND Failed the transfer connection command CONNECT Failed the transfer connection LISTEN Failed the transfer connection reception ACCEPT Failed to accept the transfer connection SOCKNAME Internal processing error RECV Failed to receive data over the transfer connection SEND Failed to send data over the transfer connection 287 FTP is failed because of file acquirement from external media 2 These errors may occur if the
84. ATUS screen You can check the operating status of the Modbus master function on the MODBUS STATUS screen Communication conditions Read cycle 258ms Time out 258ms lt Retrials 2 Comm Data Slave No Status First Last Address Registers 1 ood Ch Hh amp 2 30881 2 Good c82 C2 lt 2 30002 3 He 4 5 6 7 8 Status code Communication input Address and register Status lamp data of the DXP of the slave device Communication condition The communication status is displayed through the status lamp and the detail code Status Lamp Detail Code Meaning Green GOOD Communication is operating normally Yellow Retrying Red Communication is suspended as it is not recovered after the specified number of retrials NONE No response from the slave device FUNC The slave device cannot execute the command from the DXP REGI The slave device does not have the specified register ERR There is an error in the response data from the slave device Space The detail code is not displayed until the status is confirmed when communication is started Resuming command transmission Through key operation you can resume command transmission to the slave device to which the command transmission is stopped indicated by a red status lamp Data while retrying when command transmission is stopped While retrying the communication input data Cxx is held at the latest value When command
85. Communication Input Data This setting applies to the setting measurement server on Ethernet communications and the setting measurement function on serial communications C2 or C3 option Only the users specified here can enter values in the communication input data DX100P C01 to C12 DX200P C01 to C30 Select from the following users Off No users can use the communication input data e Admini to Admin3 User1 to User30 A user that logs into the setting measurement server can use the communication input data User31 to User90 cannot be specified If the login function is disabled no administrators are registered a user that connects to the setting function can use the communication input data e Serial A user that connects to the setting measurement function using serial communications C2 or C3 option can use the communication input data You can select Serial on models with the serial communications function Note Select Serial when using the Modbus master function Storing the settings To activate the settings made in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings return to the previous values 2 16 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see
86. DP packet to be one command and returns a single packet containing the DXP s information in response to the command Item Specifications Port number 34264 udp see section 2 1 Transfer data ASCII Received buffer length 128 Transmit buffer length 512 Maximum number of parameters 32 In the command packet parameters corresponding to the desired information are placed one after another These are the commands for the test server Parameter Description all Outputs all information that is output using the parameters below serial model host ip serial Outputs the serial number model Outputs the manufacturer model and firmware version host Outputs the host name the host name specified in section 2 3 ip Outputs the IP address the IP address specified in section 2 3 Example Query the IP address and host name Of the two frames below the top frame represents the command packet the bottom frame represents e response packet ip host EA ip 192 168 111 24 host DX200P 1 EN Description e Separate each parameter with one or more blanks space tab carriage return line feed Parameters are not case sensitive Undefined parameters will be ignored e Parameters beyond the 32nd parameter are ignored IM 04L05A01 17E 2 57 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 15 Using the Instrument Information Server Response Output Example
87. G Sets the message E Yes No 5 13 SH Sets the file header E Yes No 5 13 SE Sets the display direction background color E Yes No 5 14 trend line width trip line width number of grids scroll time and scale digit SB Sets the number of scale divisions base E Yes No 5 14 position of the bar graph and the display position of the trend scale SV Sets the moving average of the measured channel E Yes No 5 14 SF Sets the filter E Yes No 5 14 sc Sets the channel display color E Yes No 5 14 SQ Sets the LCD brightness and the screen E Yes No 5 15 backlight saver SU Sets the USER key E Yes No 5 15 SK Sets the computation constant E Yes No 5 15 SI Sets the rolling average of the computation channel E Yes No 5 15 SJ Sets the TLOG timer E Yes No 5 15 BD Sets the alarm delay time E Yes No 5 16 BG Sets the message group E Yes No 5 16 BL Sets use not use the lot number and E Yes No 5 16 automatic increment of the lot number BH Sets the batch header E Yes No 5 16 Yes Command usable No Command unusable IM 04L05A01 17E 5 3 5 2 A List of Commands Command Function Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function EH Sets the calibration correction Yes No 5 16 RD Sets whether to use DST Yes No 5 17 RT Sets the DST start end time Yes No 5 17 administrator can use the EH command even when data acquisition is in progress see page 2 23 Setting Commands System Mode e These commands can be specified when the DXP is in the
88. However the operation must be enabled in the DXP settings For the setup procedure see section 4 14 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual or the RC command e User registration EK EL and El e Calibration correction EH e Date and time setting SD When using the EK EL El and EH commands use the EE command to switch to the engineering mode use the respective command to change the setting and use the BE command to apply the setting and return to the operation mode The SD command can be used in the operation mode or engineering mode If the engineering mode display is shown when the DXP is configured to allow users to be registered other logins login to the setting measurement server FTP server or maintenance test server and login via the serial interface are not possible When the serial communication function C2 or C3 option is installed the ME command can be executed on either the Ethernet or serial interface The CM command can only used by a single specified user see section 2 6 If the DXP is configured not to use the login function no administrators are registered commands for administrators can be executed However some commands such as those that set the range SR SO SW SK SJ BL and BH commands cannot be executed when data acquisition is in progress e When logged into the setting function as a user Group Commands That Can Be Used Ref Section Control commands CC UD PS AK EV MS TL EM 5
89. IM 04L05A01 17E 2 17 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data Enabling Disabling keepalive On Off 10 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the On Off box under keepalive Keep alive On Off Off 11 Press either the On or Off soft key ee a Selecting users that are to use the communication input data 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Available user box Communication input fvai lable user 13 Press one of the soft keys from Off Admin1 to User30 off Admini Admin2 Admin3 Useri User2 Next 1 6 aeee geeeeW a Confirming Canceling the new settings 14 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 18 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server Required Settings Logging In Explanation The following settings are required when using the setting measurement server on the Ethernet network Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data Carry out the steps according to the PC software and networ
90. L06A01 01E App 10 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 92 Press ESC key to change to the operation mode Press the ESC key 93 String including space or all space cannot be specified Spaces are not allowed in the Web user name and password 94 More than one address cannot be specified Multiple addresses cannot be specified Only a single sender is allowed 95 This function is locked Unlock the function See section 4 4 100 IP address doesn t belong to class A B or C See section 2 3 101 The result of the masked IP address is all Os or 1s See section 2 3 102 SUBNET mask is incorrect See section 2 3 103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP address See section 2 3 110 This user name is not registered Enter a registered user name See sections 4 4 and 6 1 111 The login user ID is incorrect Enter the correct user ID See sections 4 4 6 1 and 6 3 112 Password must use more than 6 alphanumeric characters A space or spaces cannot be used See section 6 1 113 Password entered is incorrect Enter the correct password See sections 6 1 and 8 10 114 This user name is invalid Use a valid user name 115 Relay behavior Hold and Indicator Nonhold can not be selected See section 4 1 116 This user name cannot be specified See section
91. M command The display data residing in numeri alcsection and switches the the internal memory can be stored to the message display to 2 external storage medium at arbitrary times UD 4 0N GROUP ON OFF 2 EV4 is valid when the process type is set to Description Parameter p2 is valid on the trend digital or CONTINUE BI command and the event bar graph screens Automatically switches data are being acquired to the internal the displayed groups Use the SE command memory XM command The event data to set the switching interval scroll time residing in the internal memory can be stored Parameters p3 and p4 are valid on the trend to the external storage medium at arbitrary screen times e Parameters p5 and p6 are valid on the trend screen or on the trend screen on the 4 panel MS Writes the message display and display DX200P only save Syntax MS pl p2 lt terminator gt PS Starts Stops measurements pl Message group number 1 to 7 Memory Start Stop pl Message number 1 to 8 Syntax PS pl lt terminator gt Example Write the message of message number 8 pl Starts Stops measurements from the message group 1 0 Start MS 1 8 1 Stop Description This command displays the message to the Example Start measurement screen and writes the message to the internal PS 0 memory Description Acquires the display event and report data to This command cannot be executed when the internal memory when the measurement is measurement is stoppe
92. M04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 9 Web E Mail DX100P or 7 Web E Mail DX200P soft key to display the Web and e mail setting menu 3 Press the 1 Web soft key to display the Web menu Web menu DX100P Web menu DX200P y Web E ai Web eb Use Not Use r Wb lt 7 Use Not Use Page type 0 t on ofe a _ Page type Operator i s On Off on Access control Access control ia User name User name Password Password On Off On Off Enabling Disabling the Web server function 4 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Use Not box Web Use Not Not 5 Press either the Use or Not soft key If you select Use go to step 6 If you select Not go to step 25 Use Not eS amp s Page type type of screen to be displayed 6 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Page type box Web Use Not Use Page type On Off Off 7 Press either the Operator or Monitor soft key If you select Operator go to step 8 If you select Monitor go to step 20 E Operator page Selecting whether or not to use the operator page 8 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the On Off box Web Use Not Use Page type Operator On Off Off IM 04L05A01 17E 2 33 e u JOUJBYTy ey Buisn D 2 10 Setting the Web Server Function 9 Press either the On or Off soft key If you select On go to step 10 I
93. Modbus slave function the DXP returns the error codes below to the master device For the error messages related to communications that the DXP displays see appendix 6 Code Meaning Cause 1 Bad function code Requested a function that is not supported For supported functions see section 4 1 Modbus Protocol Specifications 2 Bad register number Tried to read write to a register that has no corresponding channel Bad number of registers The number of specified registers is zero 7 Cannot be executed Tried to read a computation register from a model that has no computation option However no response is returned for the following cases e CRC error Errors other than the ones shown above IM 04L05A01 17E 4 3 suondo 9 Z9 snqpow eu Buisn a 4 4 Setting the Configuration that is Used When the Modbus Protocol is Used Explanation Selecting the baud rate Select the baud rate from the following list 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Selecting the parity check Select the parity check from the following list Odd Even None Selecting the slave address valid when Modbus slave function is engaged Select the address from the following values 1 to 32 Selecting the protocol Modbus Use Modbus slave protocol e Modbus M Use Modbus master protocol Storing the settings To activate the settings made in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings retu
94. O command 6 26 IM 04L05A01 17E Chapter 7 Status Report 7 1 The Bit Structure of the Status Information The following four groups of status information are output in response to a status information output request using the IS command Status information 1 and 2 are cleared when they are output Status information 3 and 4 are not cleared when it is output and remains at 1 while the event is occurring For the output format see Status Information in section 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Status Information 1 Bit Name Description 0 A D conversion complete Set to 1 when the A D conversion of the measurement is complete 1 Medium access complete Set to 1 when the display event manual sampled report TLOG or screen image data file are finished being saved to the external storage medium Set to 1 when setting data is successfully saved or loaded 2 Report generation complete Set to 1 when report generation is complete 3 Timeout Set to 1 when the timer expires 4to5 6 USER key detection Set to 1 when the USER key is pressed 7 Status Information 2 Bit Name Description wo 0 Measurement drop Set to 1 when the measurement process could not keep 5 up c 1 Decimal unit information Set to 1 when the decimal unit information is changed 5 change 2 2 Command error Set to 1 when there is a command syntax error o 3 Execution e
95. On to display the monitor page on the browser e Selecting whether or not to use the access control Select On to use the access control You must enter the user name and password to display the monitor page e Setting the user name Enter the user name using up to 20 alphanumeric characters Setting the password Set the password using up to eight alphanumeric characters Operator page e Selecting whether or not to use the operator page Select On to display the operator page on the browser e Selecting whether or not to use the access control Select On to use the access control You must enter the user name and password to display the operator page e Setting the user name Enter the user name using up to 20 alphanumeric characters Setting the password Set the password using up to eight alphanumeric characters Saving the settings To activate the settings that have been changed in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings that existed before the change are activated Setting the time difference from GMT See section 4 10 Setting the Time Zone in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 01E IM 04L06A01 01E 2 32 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 10 Setting the Web Server Function Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual I
96. P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Burn out procedure OFF UP DOWN Query Example XJ XB p1 Set to UP overflow when channel 01 burns out XB 01 UP Sets the RJC When using the internal compensation circuit Syntax Query Example XJ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Reference junction compensation selection INTERNAL XJ pl Set the RJC of channel 01 to the internal compensation circuit XJ 01 INTERNAL When using an external RJC Syntax Query Example Description XV Syntax Query Example Description Syntax Query Example XJ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Reference junction compensation selection EXTERNAL p3 External RJC value 20000 to 20000 XJ pl Set the reference junction compensation of channel 02 to external and set the compensation value to 0 uV XJ 02 EXTERNAL 0 The unit of p3 is uV Sets the scan interval XV pl lt terminator gt pl Scan interval Select from 125MS or 250MS on models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P Select from 1S or 2S on models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and DX230P XV Set the scan interval to 1s XV 1S When the A D integration time p1 of XI command is set to 100 MS on models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and DX230P the scan interval can only be set to 2 s Sets the application
97. P soft key to display the Web and e mail setting menu Basic settings of e mail 3 Press the 2 Basic E Mail settings soft key to display the Web menu Basic E Mail settings DX100P Basic E Mail settings DX200P Basic E Mail settings Web E Nai 1 Basic E Nail settings SHTP server none ME Basic E ai settings Port weber os SH server nane M Recipient 1 Port number 3 Recipient 2 Recipient 1 l Goan T Recipient 2 o Eea Sender Input Clear Copy Input Clear Copy e SMTP server name 4 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the SMTP server name box Basic E ail settings SHTP server name nn Port number 2 Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Sender 5 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Cc 6 In the box enter the SMTP server name 7 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the SMTP server name box e Port number 8 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Port number box Basic E Nail settings SMTP server name Port number 25 9 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Input J IM 04L05A01 17E 2 45 e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function 10 Inthe box enter the port number 11 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Port number box e Recipient 1 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Recipient 1 box Port
98. P server Setup file when settings are changed and the setting change log file can also be transferred to an FTP server The result of the transfer is confirmed on the FTP log screen see paragraph Other functions described later e Up to two file transfer destinations FTP servers can be specified primary and secondary If the primary server is down the file is transferred to the secondary server Data file to be Destination FTP server Transfer log transferred information FTP log FTP client B L Display data file event data file report file screen image data file setup file setting change log file Ethernet Primary Secondary FTP server Se ZF y N S N FTP Test e The file transfer can be checked by transferring a test file from the DXP to a remote FTP server The result of the FTP test can be confirmed on the FTP log screen 1 4 IM 04L05A01 17E 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface Web Server The DXP screen can be displayed on the browser applications of Microsoft Internet Explorer For the procedure in using the Web server see section 2 11 Two Screens The following two screens are available The screen can be updated at a constant period approximately 30 s e Monitor Page Screen dedicated for monitoring The following information can be displayed Alarm summary e Measured computed data of all channels Logs Message summary error log FTP log e
99. PP diagdrops 16 consecutive collision incidents APP ftpsdrops 0 TREES Rane AAAS quit Disconnects the connection of ons CORRECTS Thane the device being operated TCP closed 0 TCP timeoutdrop s Syntax quit lt terminator gt TCP keepdrops 0 TCP sndtotal 53 TCP sndbyte 0 TCP sndrexmitpack 0 TCP sndrexmitbyte 1 TCP revtotal 0 TCP rcvbyte 0 DLC 16 collisions 0 EN IM 04L05A01 17E 5 39 Chapter 6 Response 6 1 Response Syntax Measurement Server Describes the responses to the commands in chapter 5 The DXP returns a response affirmative negative Output response to a command that is separated by a single delimiter The controller should follow the one command to one response format When the command response rule is not followed the operation is not guaranteed Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed Affirmative Response When the command is processed correctly an affirmative response is returned Syntax EOCRLF Example EO Single Negative Response When the command is not processed correctly a single negative response is returned Syntax El_nnn_mmm mCRLF nnn Error number 001 to 999 mmm m Message Variable length one line Space Example El 001 System error Multiple Negative Responses e If there is an error in any one of the multiple commands that are separated by sub delimiters multiple negative response are retu
100. SE NOT WA Use the SNTP server function WA USE IM 04L05A01 17E 5 25 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode WB Syntax Query Example Description WC Syntax Query Example BN Syntax Query Example BS Syntax Sets the SNTP client WB pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Use not use the SNTP client function USE NOT p2 SNTP server name up to 64 characters p3 SNTP port number 0 to 65535 p4 Access interval OFF 1h 8h 12h 24h p5 Access reference time 00 00 to 23 59 p6 Access timeout 10s 30s 90s WB Retrieve time information SNTP server ABC at hour 0 every day Set the server port to 123 and access timeout to 10 s WB ON ABC 123 24h 00 00 10s Parameter p2 to p6 are valid when p1 is set to USE Sets the SNTP client function when data acquisition is in progress WC pl lt terminator gt pl Time adjustment when data acquisition is in progress ON OFF WC Retrieve time information from an SNTP server when data acquisition is in progress and adjust the time WC ON Sets the login function BN pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Use not use the user ID to login USE NOT p2 Auto logout OFF 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN OFF Do not use auto logout p3 Screen change when logged out ON OFF BN Use the user ID when logging in and set the auto logout time to 5 minutes Change the screen when logged out BN USE 5MIN ON Sets the elect
101. SG pins as shown in the diagram on the previous page This can generate a potential difference especially for long distance communications and can damage the instrument or cause communication abnormalities For converters that do not have the SG pin they can be used without using the signal ground For details see the manual that came with the converter On some non recommended converters the signal polarity may be reversed A B or indication In this case reverse the connection For a two wire system the host computer must control the transmission driver of the converter in order to prevent collisions of transmit and received data When using the recommended converter the driver is controlled using the RS RTS signal on the RS 232 When the instrument that support only the RS 422A interface exist in the system When using the four wire type interface up to 32 DXPs can be connected to a single host computer However this may not be true if the instrument that support only the RS 422A interface exist in the system When YOKOGAWA s recorders that support only the RS 422A interface exist in the system The maximum number of connection is 16 Some of YOKOGAWA s conventional recorders HR2400 and uR for example only support the RS 422A driver In this case only up to 16 units can be connected Note In the RS 422A standard 10 is the maximum number of connections that are allowed on one port for a four wire system T
102. SNTP server or an SNTP client on the Ethernet network To use this function however the Ethernet interface must be configured as described in section 2 3 Setting the SNTP Server Function e Server settings Use Not Sets whether to use the SNTP server function Setting the SNTP Client Function e Client settings Use Not Sets whether to use the SNTP client function Server name Set the access destination of time information using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e lf the DNS is used you can set the server host name as a server name For details on setting the DNS see section 2 3 e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port number Set the port number of the SNTP server in the range from 1 to 65535 The default value is 123 e Access interval Select the time interval for accessing the time on the SNTP server from Off 1h 8h 12h or 24h Time is not queried if Off is selected e Access reference time The time used as a reference for the time query The time is queried at the specified access interval with respect to this time Set the time in the range of 00 00 to 23 59 e Access timeout The timeout period for a response from the SNTP server If no response is received within this time period time query will not be performed Select 10s 30s or 90s e SNTP synched to start Time adjust on Start action Set whether to query the time using the SNTP client function On Off when data acq
103. Serial menu Ethernet r Serial Serial IP address a 8 8 Baud rate 9628 bp Baud rate Ee bps Subnet mask a 8 8 0 Data length 3 bit Data length 8 bit Default gateway b o 8 8 Parity Even F RS 232 LORS Even raai iene MU Handshakins _ OFF OFF RS 232 Primary a 0 6 Spiele I Handshaking Off OFF Secondary b 8 B B ress I Protocol RS 422A 485 i konal Address 1 Domain nane Henory out JEthernet Protocol Normal DE ffi nee Hemory out Ethernet Primary meee 1200 2400 4800 9600 Next 1 2 2 ay Selecting the baud rate 4 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Baud rate box Serial Baud rate EM bps Data length 8 bit Pani ti Cuan 5 Press one of the soft keys from 1200 to 38400 to select the baud rate 1208 2400 4300 19288 38400 Se aa O B Selecting the data length 6 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Data length box Baud rate 9688 bps Data lensth Ebit Parity J Even 7 Press the 7 or 8 soft key to select the data length ee a Selecting the parity 8 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Parity box Data lensth 8 bit Parity Even 9 Press one of the soft keys from Odd to None to select the parity check Odd Even None eae ce IM 04L05A01 17E suondo 9 ZD 89e 19 U jenas y Huisy B 3 5 Configuring the Serial Interface Selecting the handshaking Valid onl
104. Start 1 the log at line 7 is output EA 01 06 15 12 30 00 MathStart KEY tsuchiya EN For the command FI0 yoshino tsuchiya 10 logs at lines 1 2 3 7 and 8 are output For the command FI0 MathStart MathStop 10 logs at lines 4 5 7 and 8 are output For the command FI0 MathStart MathStop 2 logs at lines 7 and 8 are output For the command FI0 uchiyama MathStart 10 the log at line 4 is output 6 14 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Web Operation Log The FL command is used to output the data The log of operations on the operator page is output Up to 50 logs are retained Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest log Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_ffffff_eee CRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 ffffff Operation code SCREEN Switching screens KEY Key operation eee Error code J All space succeeded 2 001 to 999 Error code Sg 2P2eee Detailed operation code 3 When ffffff SCREEN yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ffffff_eee_ddddd nnCRLF ddddd Screen TREND Trend screen DIGIT Digital screen BAR Bar graph screen nn Group number 01 to 06 When ffffff KEY yy mo dd_hh mm ss_ffffff_eee_kkkkkCRLF kkkkk Key DISP The DISP ENTER key UP The up arrow key DOWN The down arrow key LEFT The left arrow key RIGHT The right arrow key _ Space Example EA 01 02
105. Start Stop Outputs Memory Start Stop UserLocked Outputs the occurrence of a user locked condition Login Outputs the presence of a logged in user Query BR pl Example Set the memory end alarm optput to the system relay 1 BR 1 MemoryEnd Description This command can be used on models with the FAIL memory end option F1 YA Syntax Query Example YK Syntax Query Example YN Sets the IP address subnet mask and default gateway YA pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl IP address 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p2 Subnet mask 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Default gateway 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 YA Set the IP address to 192 168 111 24 subnet mask to 255 255 255 0 and default gateway to 0 0 0 0 YA 192 168 111 24 255 255 255 0 0 0 0 0 Sets keepalive YK pl lt terminator gt pl Enable Disable keepalive ON OFF YK Disable keepalive YK OFF Sets the DNS When not using the DNS Syntax Query Example YN pl lt terminator gt pl Use Not use the DNS OFF YN Do not use the DNS YN OFF When using the DNS Syntax Query Example YQ YN pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Use Not use the DNS ON p2 Address of the primary DNS server 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Address of the secondary DNS server 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p4 Host name Up to 64 characters p5 Domain name Up to 64 characters p6 Domain suffix 1 Up to 64 characters p7 Domain suffix
106. The parameters of the packet that are returned as a response are lined up according to the following format Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed EACRLF Parameter 1 value of parameter 1 CRLF Parameter 2 value of parameter 2 CRLF ENCRLF e The parameter values are output in the order specified by the command parameter e The output order of the parameters when all is specified is not constant e Even if the same parameters are specified numerous times only the first occurrence is output e Lower case characters are used for the parameters oo indicates a space Several output examples are indicated below Packet Parameter Sent as Commands Response The a11 parameter can be used to output all information for parameters serial model host and ip all EA serial 12V636848 model YOKOGAWA DX200P 1 01 host DX200P 1 ip 192 168 111 24 EN Parameters are not case sensitive ip Host EA ip 192 168 111 24 host DX200P 1 EN Even if the same parameters are specified numerous times only the first occurrence is output host ip host ip host model EA host DX200 1 ip 192 168 111 24 model YOKOGAWA DX200P 1 01 EN Undefined parameters are ignored Space EA EN 2 58 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 16 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Explanation The DXP can operate as an
107. User s DAQSTATION DX100P DX200P Manual fen Communication Interface 4L5 A117 E60 4 YOKOGAWA IM 04L05A01 17E 4th Editi Yokogawa Electric Corporation th Edition Forward Notes Trademarks Revisions Disk No RE33 4rd Edition August 2004 YK Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA DAQSTATION DX100P DX200P hereinafter the DXP This Communication Interface User s Manual contains information about the communication functions such as the Ethernet serial interface To ensure correct use please read this manual thoroughly before operation Keep this manual in a safe place for quick reference in the event a question arises The following five manuals including this one are provided as manuals for the DX100P DX200P Manual Name Manual No Description DX100P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 01E Explains all functions and procedures of the DX100P excluding the communication functions DX200P User s Manual IM 04L06A01 01E Explains all functions and procedures of the DX200P excluding the communication functions DX100P DX200P IM 04L05A01 02E Briefly explains the basic operations of the Operation Guide DXP DX100P DX200P IM 04L05A01 17E This manual Explains the communication Communication Interface functions of the Ethernet serial interface User s Manual DAQSIGNIN IM 04L05A01 61E Describes the functions and operating User s Manual procedures of DAQSIGNIN This manual describes t
108. acquisition is in progress where is the channel number MemorySave Executing the data save operation of the internal memory while data acquisition is stopped 1 Information on the registered users 2 Excludes the login information 3 For maintenance purposes The operating procedure is not described in this manual Operation type KEY Key operation REM Remote control MRS Setting function setting measurement server FTP FTP server 6 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data ms_ Monitor function setting measurement server TST Setting function maintenance test server tss Monitor function maintenance test server SRL Serial communications SYS Automatic operation by the DXP uuu u User name 20 characters ccc c Detailed information Outputs detailed information for the following operations When xxxxxxxxxx CCSet When the number of set points is changed Point aaa gt bbb aaa The number of set points before the change Off 01 to 16 bbb The number of set points after the change Off 01 to 16 When the measured value or true value of a certain point is changed pp ccccccc ddddddd gt eeeeeee ffffffFt pp Set point that was changed a ececcce Measured value of pp before the change 2 ddddddd True value of pp before the change S eeeeeee Measured value of pp after the change pa a op as aw True value of pp after the change When xxxxxxxxxx TRevStart Adjus
109. aees 1 1 Setting Measurement Server ooo cecceesceeeseeeseeteneeseeeeeaeeeeaeeeaeessaeeeaeeseaeessaeeeaeesaeeeeesneeenaees 1 2 FTP Serve ieccvcelesccesvecadecck evel da ceveaseesQuceesde sobs EE ae ee TE A EEE a E EET 1 3 A AEA Ea EA EA TAE TAEA ETEA 1 4 EIEE I aE AAE EEE EEE AE E EE E EE E E A AET 1 5 AEEA E e EE AAEE A A EA ace agheli Set 1 6 NAE E EEA TE TEE A TETA EE 1 7 SNTE CIEN nnnm a e e aa E 1 7 Maintenance Test Server ccccccccesscccseeeeseneeeeseeeesceeeessaeeeesaeeesceeeeeseaeeeeceeeeseeeeesenseessaes 1 8 Instrument Information Server cccccccccesecceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeceaeececneeeseaeeecsaeeeeceeeeessneeesssees 1 8 Other FUNCIONS 233 a26s Beeches Mee elneehicie Mitesh lee 1 8 Overview of the Configuration cccceesceeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeseaeesaeseaeesaeeeaeesseeeeieeeneetaees 1 9 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Serial Interface c eeeeeee 1 10 Functional Structures ics xcscseer eles eet aA avn eterna oe 1 10 Setting Measurement FUNCTION ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesineteaeeseaeeeeenias 1 11 Modbus Slave 2 cs cicseiieli eel dais hel a E aae a E a a e aE ei leet 1 12 Modbus Mastr nni e e a r eid eae 1 12 Barcode Inp tsar iier iia ae ei aaia 1 13 Displaying Error Communication FTP Web operation E mail 109S ceeceeeeseeeeees 1 13 Overview of the Configuration cccceeccesseeeeneeeeeeeeeeceeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeesaeesea
110. ages to the recipient Contents of the transmitted mail See Contents of the transmitted mail on the previous page The instantaneous values of all channels are not to be added The default value for Subject is DX System_warning IM 04L05A01 17E 2 43 eu u JOUJAYTy ey Busy D 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function Settings when transmitting e mail messages at the time of report creation for models with the computation function M1 e Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Turn On Off for each recipient e On Transmits e mail messages to the recipient e Off Does not transmit e mail messages to the recipient e Contents of the transmitted mail See Contents of the transmitted mail on page 2 38 The instantaneous values of all channels are not to be added The default value for Subject is DX Report_data Saving the settings To activate the settings that have been changed in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings that existed before the change are activated 2 44 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 9 Web E Mail DX100P or 7 Web E Mail DX200
111. ails see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual e 15S and 30S of p1 apply only to models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P When the application setting BI command is Batch the auto save interval is fixed to an available maximum value parameter p3 cannot be set arbitrarily Sets the zone SZ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Zone lower limit 0 to 95 p3 Zone upper limit 5 to 100 SZ pl Display channel 02 in a zone between 30 and 50 SZ 02 30 50 e Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 The total display width of the screen in the direction of the amplitude is taken to be 100 The zone width must be at least 5 Set the parameters for the zone upper and lower limits so that the upper limit is greater than the lower limit Sets the partial expanded display SP pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Enable disable ON OFF the partial expansion setting p3 Boundary position 1 to 99 p4 Boundary value SP pl Partially expand the display of channel 01 Set the boundary position to 25 and the boundary value to 1 00 V SP 01 0N 25 100 Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1
112. al scroll time for switching displayed group 5s 10s 20s 30s 1min p8 Scale digit NORMAL FINE SE Set the display direction of the trend waveform to horizontal the direction of the bar graph to vertical the background color to white the line width of the trend to 1 dot the width of the trip line to 2 dots the number of grids to 10 the time interval for switching displayed group to 20s and the scale digit to NORMAL SE HORIZONTAL VERTICAL WHITE 1 2 10 20s NORMAL Sets the number of scale divisions base position of the bar graph and the display position of the trend scale SB pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Number of scale divisions 4 to 12 C10 p3 Base position of the bar graph display NORMAL CENTER p4 Position of the scale for the trend display OFF DX100P 1 to 6 DX200P 1 to 10 SB pl Set the number of scale divisions of the bar graph of channel 02 to 5 and display the bar graph from the span lower limit scaling lower limit if scaling is enabled Display the scale at the third position SB 02 5 NORMAL 3 Description SV Syntax Query Example Description SF Syntax Query Example Description SC Syntax Query Example Description e Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 The base pos
113. ame Up to 20 characters o Space Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 51112200 KEY administrator4567890 01 05 11 12 30 00 51112300 MRS userl EN SNTP Log The FL command is used to output the data e The access log of the SNTP server is output Up to 50 logs are retained in the internal memory Logs that exceed 50 are cleared from the oldest data Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_nnn_xxxxxxxxxCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 nnn Error code All spaces Success _ _1 to 999 Error code See appendix 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 19 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data XXX X Detailed code up to 9 characters SUCCESS Success OVER Exceeds the deviation time DORMANT Internal processing error HOSTNAME Failed to look up the host name TCPIP Internal processing error SEND Failed to send the request because the IP address of the DXP was not assigned correctly TIMEOUT A response timeout occurred BROKEN The response from the server is indefinite data LINK The data link is disconnected Space Example EA 03 11 10 11 40 00 SUCCESS 03 11 10 11 41 00 SUCCESS 03 11 10 11 45 00 292 HOSTNAME EN Status Information The IS command is used to output the data The operation status of the DXP is output e For details related to the status information see section 7 1 The Bit Structure of the Status Information Syn
114. and interface connector routers for example Ethernet cable Note Communications may take time depending on the network conditions such as when data traffic is excessively high or when communication is affected by external noise Communication performance deteriorates if multiple PCs access the recorder simultaneously 2 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Explanation The following configurations must be made in order to use the Ethernet communication functions of the DXP Setting the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS Confirm the settings such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS with the administrator of the system or network on which the recorder is to be used IP address e Set the IP address to assign to the DXP The default setting is 0 0 0 0 The IP address is used to distinguish between the various devices connected to the Internet when communicating using the TCP IP protocol The address is a 32 bit value normally expressed with four values 0 to 255 each separated by a period as in 192 168 111 24 Subnet mask e Specify the mask that is used to determine the network address from the IP address The default setting is 0 0 0 0 e Set this value according to the system or the network to which the DXP belongs In some cases this setting may not be necessary Default gateway Set the IP address of the gateway router
115. ange log file File DPL Appendix 2 ME 24 Reserved See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 6 3 suods y ol 6 1 Response Syntax Calculating the sum value If you set the parameter of the CS command to 1 enabled the checksum value is output only during serial communications The sum value can be derived from the following algorithm On the Ethernet network checksum according to the following algorithm is carried out automatically in the TCP IP layer Therefore this checksum is not used Header sum and data sum are fixed to 0 Buffer on which the sum value is calculated e For the header sun it is calculated from data length flag identifier fixed to 6 bytes e For the data sum it is calculated from BINARY data 1 byte Padding 1 2 3 4 5 6 If the data length of the buffer is odd a 0 is padded so that it is even 1 through 6 are summed as unsigned two byte integers unsigned short When the digit overflows a 1 is added Finally the result is bit wise inverted Sample program The sum value is determined using the following sample program and the calculated result is returned The sum determined by the sample program can be compared with the header sum of the output BINARY header section and the data sum of the output BINARY footer section Sum Calculation Function for a 32 bit CPU Parameter buff Pointer to
116. aracters instantaneous values but the URL Set p7 Header 2 Up to 64 characters the subject and the header 1 to ALM and Query YU p1 LP2 respectively Example Send report mails to the recipient 1 with YU ALARM ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON OFF ALM the URL of the DXP attached Set the LP2 subject and the header 1 to Report and LP2 respectively When setting the scheduled mail YU REPORT ON OFF ON Report LP2 Syntax YU pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 p11 p12 Sterna Ore Description For details on the system mail see section pl Type TIME 1 1 p pecipient 1 CON7 QEF The report mail can be used on models with p3 thterval for TEciprente 1e IH 2E Sey the computation function option M1 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H A aa aa 3 p4 Time to send mail to recipient 1 YV Sets the recipient sS address HH MM ne Syntax YV pl p2 lt terminator gt p5 Recipient 2 ON OFF Paes pl Recipient p Interval for recipient 2 1H 2H 3H 1 Recipient 1 4H 6H 8H 12H 24H i n 2 Recipient 2 p7 Time to send mail to recipient 2 p2 Addresses Up to 150 characters HH MM Query YV p1 p8 Instantaneous values ON OFF p9 URL of the DXP ON OFF 5 24 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode Example Description YW Syntax Query Example YX Syntax Query Example EF Syntax Query Example EG Syntax Query Set the addresses for the recipient 1 to Cont good co jp and Adm good co jp
117. at 0 C CU25 200 0 to 300 0 C 2000 to 3000 Measurement range that can be specified on models with the Cu10 Cu25 resistance temperature detector option N1 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 3 Input Range Parameter Digital Input Dl Measurement Parameter forthe Value of the Upper and Value of the Upper and Range SR Command Lower Limits of the Span Lower Limits of the SR Upper and Lower Limits Command of the Measurement Range Voltage LEVEL 0 or 1 0 or 1 Contact CONT 0 or 1 0 or 1 1 0 when less than 2 4 V 1 when greater than or equal to 2 4 V 2 0 when contact is OFF 1 when contact is ON Note For the measurement accuracy of each measurement range see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E IM 04L05A01 17E spuewwog po 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode SR Sets the input range When setting channels to skip Syntax SR pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Range mode SKIP Query SR pl Example Skips channel 01 SR 01 SKIP Description Measurements are not made on channels that are set to SKIP When setting the channels to voltage thermocouple RTD or digital input Syntax SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Input type VOLT DC VOLTAGE TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperatu
118. ata B RDA Received Data A Received data A Connection Procedure Cable There are two types of cables available the four wire cable and the two wire cable used only for the Modbus protocol The cable should meet the following specifications Cable Twisted pair cable 3 pairs 24 AWG or more four wire 2 pair 24AWG or more two wire Characteristic impedance 100 Q Capacitance 50 pF m Cable length Up to 1 2 km The transmission distance of the RS 422A 485 interface is not the straight line distance but rather the total length of the twisted pair shielded cable Cable connection procedure As shown in the figure below attach a crimp style terminal with an isolating sleeve for 4 mm screws to the end of the cable Keep the section that is exposed from the shielded cable to 5 cm or less Four wire Two wire TN nN nN nN nN nS TN nN N N N N SZ SZ SZ SZ N N J J NA SA FG SG SDB SDA BDR RDA FG amp 6 SDB aoe RDB RDA A WARNING To prevent electric shock turn OFF the power when connecting cables INOle ee e As shown on the next page connect the RD pin to the SD TD pin on the PC converter side and the SD pin to the RD pin on the PC side The two wire cable can be used only when using the Modbu
119. ation time See section 4 15 170 End process can t proceed because setting file is not saved Check the external storage medium to Media See section 3 5 171 The selected configuration file is not compatible with this system Select other configuration file 172 Data save is not possible in the current operating mode Save engineering mode settings first See section 5 24 173 Data save is not possible because of insufficient media capacity Use another storage medium See section 5 24 IM 04L05A01 17E App 11 xipueddy E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Operation Errors e Errors Related to External Storage Medium Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 200 Operation aborted because an error was found on media Check the storage medium 201 Not enough free space on media Use another storage medium 202 Media is read only Release the write protection 210 Media has not been inserted Insert a storage medium into the drive 211 Media is damaged or not formatted Use another storage medium or carry out formatting 212 Format error Try formatting again or use another storage medium 213 The file is read only Access to other files or make the file write enable 214 There is no file or directory See section 5 3 215 Exceeded the allowable number of files Delete files or change storage medium 216 The file or directory name is incorrect See secti
120. atus BQ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Acknowledges user locked status 0 Acknowledge user locked status BQ 0 BJ Syntax Example Description CM Syntax Query Example Description EJ Syntax Example Description SD Syntax Writes the free message BJ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Message number 1 to 8 p2 Message Up to 32 characters Write the free message 1 Start abc BJ 1 Start abc This command displays the message to the screen and writes the message to the internal memory This command cannot be specified when measurement is stopped Sets the communication input data CM pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Communication input data number DX100P COL to C12 DX200P C01 to c30 p2 Communication input data 9 The range is 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 3 30 0 and 1 0000E 30 to 3 9 9999E 29 a O The sign of E can be omitted The maximum number of significant digits is 5 CM Set the communication input data 1 0000E 10 in the communication input data number col CM CO1 1 0000E 10 This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 A specified user EQ command can use this command Changes the password EJ pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Password in use up to 8 characters p2 New password up to 8 characters p2 New password for confirmation up to 8 characters Change password to BBBBBBBB from
121. ay MESSAGE Message summary display MEMORY Memory summary display ALARMACK Alarm ACK summary display p3 Group number 1 to 6 Example Set the display to 1 screen display display the trend and set the group number to 4 UD 1 TREND 4 Description Parameter p3 is valid when p2 is set to TREND DIGITAL or BAR Switching to 4 panel display only for DX200P Syntax UD pl1 p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator gt pl Switching the screen 2 p2 The display item of the upper left quadrant of the divided screen screen 1 TREND Trend display DIGITAL Digital display BAR Bar graph display p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 Example Set the OVERVIEW Overview display Alarm indicator ALARM Alarm summary display MESSAGE Message summary display MEMORY Memory summary display ALARMACK Alarm ACK summary display The group number 1 to 6 to display in the upper left quadrant of the divided screen screen 1 The display item of the lower left quadrant of the divided screen screen 2 same as the selections for p2 The group number 1 to 6 to display in the lower left quadrant of the divided screen screen 2 The display item of the upper right quadrant of the divided screen screen 3 same as the selections for p2 The group number 1 to 6 to display in the upper right quadrant of the spuewwog divided screen screen 3 The display item of the lower right quadrant of the divided screen screen 4
122. ble the flow of operation when outputting data from the DXP a list of error messages and the login process Index Provides an index ii IM 04L05A01 17E How to Use this Manual Conventions Used in this Manual Unit e k Denotes 1000 Example 5 kg 100 kHz e KDenotes 1024 Example 720 KB Symbols The following symbols are used in this manual Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or damage to the instrument This symbol appears on the instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user s manual for special instructions The same symbol appears in the corresponding place in the user s manual to identify those instructions In the manual the symbol is used in conjunction with the word WARNING or CAUTION WARNING Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent injury or death to the user CAUTION Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent minor a or moderate injury or damage to the instrument Note Provides important information for the proper operation of the instrument Displayed characters Alphanumeric characters enclosed with refer to characters or setting values that are displayed on the screen Symbols used on pages describing operating procedures On pages that describe the operating procedures in Chapter 2 through 4 the following symbols are used to distinguish the procedures from their explanations This section describes the set
123. box Serial Baud rate ES bps Data length 8 bit 5 Press one of the soft keys from 1200 to 38400 to select the baud rate 1288 2400 4888 9688 19288 38488 ED CD amp Selecting the parity check 6 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Parity box Data length 8 bit Parity _Even ne ann 7 Press one of the soft keys from Odd to None to select the parity check Odd Even None ee F amp F we IM 04L05A01 17E 4 5 suondo 9 Z3 snapo y Buisn B 4 4 Setting the Configuration that is Used When the Modbus Protocol is Used Selecting the slave address valid when Modbus slave function is engaged 8 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Address box RS 422A 485 Address Protocol Normal 9 Press one of the soft keys from 1 to 32 to select the address 1 2 3 4 5 6 Next 1 6 Se ge aaa amp Setting the protocol 10 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Protocol box RS 422A 485 Address J 1 Protocol 11 Press the Modbus soft key when using the Modbus slave function Press the Modbus M soft key when using the Modbus master function Off Normal Modbus Modbus H Barcode CO CO a ae CL Confirming Canceling the new settings 12 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation
124. c settings Read cycle pensions A Read cycle 125ms Timeout 125ms Tineout EJ Retrials off Retrials Off settings 125ms 25 ms 5 ms 1s Next 1 2 1 orf dta 3 Off 4 ort 5 off 6 Off 1 ot 8 of 125ns 250ns 588ms Is 2s 5s 18s Selecting the read cycle 4 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Read cycle box Basic settings Read cycle Timeout 125ns Retrials Off 5 Press one of the soft keys from 125ms to 10s to select the read cycle ED D Ge Selecting the timeout time 6 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Time out box Basic settings Read cycle 125ms Timeout Retrials Off 7 Press one of the soft keys from 125ms to 1min to select the timeout time 125ms 258ns 588ns 1s 2s 5s Next 172 D l M M lM 4 10 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function Selecting the number of retrials 8 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Retrials box Basic settings Read cycle 125ms Timeout 125ms Retrials Off 9 Press one of the soft keys from Off to 20 to select the address Off i 2 3 4 5 Next 1 2 agQeFwwFewwww s Ga For DX100P confirm the new settings pressing the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Setting the
125. cation function using the Ethernet interface that comes standard with the DXP For a description of how to use the Ethernet interface see chapter 2 Functional Structure The following figure shows the relationship between the communication function of the DXP and the Ethernet interface To use the communication function of the DXP via the Ethernet interface communications must be performed according to the protocol that lies in between two Protocol is a set of rules that two computers use to communicate via a communication line or network The communication functions of the DXP Setting Maintenance Web E mail SNTP SNTP Instrument Application Measurement Test server server client client server client Information server server server Upper layer Dedicated protocol protocol for the DXP Lower layer protocol IP Ethernet interface Interface 10BASE T Connect the DXP and the PC using an Ethernet cable FTP File Transfer Protocol TCP Transmission Control Protocol UDP User Datagram Protocol IP Internet Protocol HTTP Hyper Text Transfer Protocol SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol SNTP Simple Network Time Protocol Connection to the Server Functions Register at least an administrator to use the login function of the DXP see section 4 4 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual To connect to the setting measurement server FTP server or maintenance test server
126. cessing the primary FTP server in the entry box 25 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Password box Setting the account used when accessing the FTP server 26 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Account box Password Account E se PASV mode off 27 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box eS 28 Enter the account that is used when accessing the primary FTP server in the entry box 29 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Account box e Enabling On Disabling Off the PASV mode 30 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the PASV mode box Account l PASY mode Off Initial path 31 Press either the On or Off soft key e Setting the initial path file transfer destination directory 32 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Initial path box PASY mode Off Initial path 2 14 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 5 Setting the FTP Client 33 34 35 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Input Enter the file transfer destination directory in the entry box Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Initial path box Setting the secondary FTP server Set the secondary FTP server when specifying a secondary file transfer destination If you are not using the secondary FTP server go to step 39 36 37 38 Press the arrow key t
127. client function S Yes No 5 26 wc Sets the SNTP client function when data S Yes No 5 26 acquisition is started Commands used to set the login information BN Sets the login function S Yes No 5 26 O BS Sets the electronic signature function S Yes No 5 26 S EK Sets administrators E S Yes No 5 26 3 EL Sets users E S Yes No 5 27 BW Sets the login mode sign authority level S Yes No 5 27 o BK Sets the login mode key operations S Yes No 5 27 BM Sets the login mode alarm ACK and removal of S Yes No 5 27 Zip disk BF Sets the login mode FUNC key operations etc S Yes No 5 27 EI Sets whether or not to use the setting of E 8 Yes No 5 28 calibration correction and measuring range Ifthe DXP is configured to allow users to be registered while data acquisition is in progress an administrator can use the EK EL and El commands even when data acquisition is in progress see page 2 23 Control Commands Command Function Execution Mode Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function cc Disconnects an Ethernet connection oO E S Yes Yes 5 28 This command can be used only during Ethernet communications FR Sets the acquiring interval to the FIFO buffer 0 E Yes No 5 28 EE Switches the mode from the operation mode o Yes No 5 28 UD Switches the screen 0 Yes No 5 29 PS Starts stops measurements Memory start stop 0 Yes No 5 30 AK Confirms the alarm status alarm acknowledge o Yes No 5 30 EV Manual sample snapshot saving the d
128. command For DX100P when settings are confirmed by step 9 press the ESC key to return to the communication function setting menu and then press the 8 Modbus master COMMAND soft key to display the command setting menu 10 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the On Off box Command settings Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 im feo co f 1i aaao f INTIS 2 of 3 of 11 Press either the On or Off soft key If you select On go to step 12 If you select Off go to step 23 ee a amp e Communication input data First Last 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the First channel box Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 for fom feo Jf 1 Jf 3am J Inte 13 Press one of the soft keys from C01 to C12 DX100P or C01 to C30 DX200P to select the first communication input data Cal C2 cas CA4 ca5 cae Next 1 5 cD B ae 14 Set the last communication input data using the same method as steps 12 and 13 Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type g on co 7 em f 1 J Seem f INTG e Slave address 15 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Address box Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 on co Z 0 30001 INTIG IM 04L05A01 17E 4 11 suondo 9 Z3 snapo y Buisn D 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function 16 Press the Input soft key to display the en
129. creen p2 Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 31 4 panel displays can be set using the SY ig ee a aaa se conimand p3 Alarm number 1 to 4 Example Executes alarm acknowledge against the Turning ON or OFF automatic switching of the ay Sumber aon eee displayed groups switching to all channel display O ret g Description Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 1 from group display or vice versa turning ON or OFF the scales turning ON or OFF the numerical section on the trend sree and switching the EV Manual sample snapshot T message displ y saving display data and saving Syntax UD pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt event data pl Switching the screen 4 Syntax EV pl lt terminator gt p2 Enables disables automatic switching pl Operation type of the displayed groups ON OFF 0 Perform manual sampling p3 Switches all channel display and 2 Snapshot group display ALL GROUP 3 Save the display data to the p4 Turns the scale display ON OFF ON storage medium OFF 4 Save the event data to the p5 Turns the numerical display section storage medium ON OFF ON OFF Example Perform manual sampling p6 Switches the message display 1 2 EV 0 Example Enables the automatic switching of the Description EV3 is valid when the process type is set to displayed groups switches to group BATCH BI command and the display data display from all channel display turns are being acquired to the internal memory ON the scale display turns OFF the X
130. creen displayed on the DXP trend digital bar graph and other screens is displayed on the monitor page Note A character that is set on the DXP is displayed as a character on the Web browser e Refreshing the monitor page The monitor page can be refreshed automatically or manually e Auto refresh ON The monitor page is refreshed at a refresh rate of approximately 30 s e Auto refresh OFF Monitor page is not automatically refreshed You can refresh the page manually However the page cannot be refreshed in approximately 30 seconds after the page refreshment e Zooming in or out of the screen The DXP screen that is displayed on the monitor page can be reduced to 75 in size DX200P or expanded to 200 DX100P The size of the DX200P s screen is reduced to 75 sub 43naterial 2 11344 material 1 11 44 start zat dn IM 04L05A01 17E 2 37 e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 11 Using the Web Server Displaying the alarm summary Displays the alarm summary Click Refresh to refresh the data Refreshes the summary T Refresh Close Creation date Jul 08 2002 08 48 57 mai Time Time Jul 08 2002 EE e Jul 08 2002 Jul 08 2002 Jul 08 2002 A 1R 08 46 10 08 46 10 08 47 09 Jul08 2002 Jul08 2002 Jul08 2002 E IR 08 15 52 08 15 53 08 17 52 Power Fal Displaying measured computed data Displays the measured computed data of all channels exclu
131. cseeeeeeeeeeneeeees 2 3 confirming operation ee Vil confirming the connection Status ccceeeeeeesteeteeeeeeees 1 8 connecting the Ethernet interface cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeees 2 2 connection Status cireni oiiaaie 1 8 connection to the server functions s 1 1 connector pin arrangement RS 232 sesser 3 2 control command Do data dropout Modbus master cece 4 14 App 9 data length os iistscceccscssccveceeerscdestsesereouecesstceareestaneseavsettortcees 3 10 data length BINARY output 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeeee 6 2 data reception control 0 eee cece eee eee eeneeeeeeeteeeeeneeneees 3 3 data SUI ek Ss Bike oes ah act aE oa ah ea Aaaa aao 6 3 data transmission control ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeetes 3 3 default gateway sssssssessessresssrrusenserusrnstreennrraneenrinsensrenees 2 3 default password 2 21 dEliIM TOT Menia a i anaE 5 2 disconnecting the RS 422A 485 connection 3 14 DISP ENTER key cc ceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeee iv BIN KE E E E EA ears 2 3 DNS SCIVERS ienn reeda aa 2 3 domai NAM GC sirios a ca ene a 2 3 domain SUPPIX 0 ccrccecesosnapacdeedavecdecdacceaucacdteaeanaaecdnaseaseanse nd 2 4 E e mail MESSAGE wiviencesicsseecsvecesorcecscessecestevvedecersescesersensrened e mail transmission cccccceeessteeeeeeesssseaeeeeeessesseeeeeeeeeees e mail transmi
132. ctory of the storage medium System mode IM 04L05A01 17E 5 33 5 6 Control Commands LL Syntax Example Description BV Syntax Example Description BP Syntax Example settings are not loaded This command cannot be executed when data acquisition is in progress Logs in via the serial interface Command used to log in via the serial interface When this command is used list the commands to be executed using sub delimiter The command is executed after logging in and then automatically logs out LO pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl User name p2 User ID p3 Password p4 New password when the password is expired p5 New password for confirmation Login as User ABC User ID 5555 and password f2gyk6 and start data acquisition LL ABC 5555 f2gyk6 PS 0 Users that are allowed to log in via communication can log in see the EK and EL commands Ifthe user ID is not used p2 is invalid Ifthe password is not expired p4 and p5 are invalid They can be omitted This command cannot be used on the Ethernet interface Enters characters This command is used for barcode input only BV pl p2 lt terminator gt pl 0 fixed p2 Character string up to 100 characters Enter sample ABC BV 0 sample ABC This command is valid when the cursor is at an item that requires character strings to be entered or when a window for entering character strings is di
133. d started 5 30 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 6 Control Commands TL Syntax Example Description EM Syntax Example Syntax Query Example Description BC Syntax Query Example Description BQ Syntax Example Starts stops resets computation MATH Clears the computation dropout status display TL pl lt terminator gt pl Operation type 0 Start computation 1 Stop computation 2 Reset computation 3 Clear the computation dropout status display Start computation TL 0 This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 Starts stops the e mail transmission function EM pl lt terminator gt pl Starts Stops the e mail function 0 Start 1 Stop Start the e mail function EM 0 Sets the batch No ans lot No BB pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Batch number Up to 32 characters p2 Lot number 0 to 99999999 BB Set the batch number to LOT the lot number to 2 BB LOT 2 Parameter p2 cannot be specified unless the the DXP is set to use the lot number p1 BL commana This command cannot be specified while measurement is in progress Sets the batch comment BC pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Comment number 1 to 3 p2 Character string Up to 32 characters BC pl Set the character string COMMENT to the comment number 1 BC 1 COMMENT This command cannot be specified while measurement is in progress Acknowledges user locked st
134. d 250 are cleared from the oldest message Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_gg nn_mmm m_ppp_uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 gg Message group number 01 to 08 08 Free message nn Message number 01 to 08 mmm em Message 32 characters Spaces are embedded when the number of characters is less than 32 ppp Operation type KEY Key operation REM Remote control MRS Setting function setting measurement server SRL Serial communications uuus u User name Up to 20 characters d Space Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 01 01 HelloHello HelloHello HelloHello KEY sh 01 05 11 12 20 00 03 05 morning KEY US EN 6 18 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Setting Change Log The FL command is used to output the log of setting changes in the internal memory Up to 200 logs are retained in the internal memory Logs that exceed 200 are cleared from the oldest log Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mm ss_xxxxxxxx_ppp uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mm Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 XXX X File name 8 characters Spaces are embedded when the number of characters is less than 8 characters ppp Operation type KEY Key operation D MRS Setting function setting measurement server 2 SRL Serial communications Sg uuus u User n
135. d computed data that is output in BINARY format using the FD command or FF command see section 6 3 and the decimal point position and unit information obtained using the FE command Syntax EACRLF s_kccuuuuuu ppCRLF ENCRLF s Data status N Normal D Differential input S Skip When the measurement range is set to SKIP for a measurement channel or when the channel is turned OFF for a computation channel k Channel type 0 Measurement channel A Computation channel cc Channel number 01 to 60 uuuuuu Unit information 6 characters left justified mV mV V_ V Cc 2 C XXXXXX user defined character string pp Decimal position 00 to 04 No decimal 00000 for 00 One digit below the decimal 0000 0 for 01 Two digits below the decimal 000 00 for 02 Three digits below the decimal 00 000 for 03 Four digits below the decimal 0 0000 for 04 E Space Example EA N 001mV Ol N 002mv Ol EN 6 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Most Recent Measured Computed Data The FD command is used to output the data Syntax EACRLF DATE_yy mo ddCRLF TIME hh mi ss mmmtCRLF s_kcca aza3a uuuuuufdddddE ppCRLF ENCRLF yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 mmm Millisecond 000 to 999 A period is placed between seconds and milliseconds Summer time or winter time S summer time Space winter
136. d for dropping the connection is sent Send the close command ESC c e When another device is opened Example If you open the DXP at address 2 while the DXP at address 1 is open the DXP at address 1 is automatically closed Note If the login function is not used the PC connects to the setting function of the DXP In this case when a command for exiting the system mode EC or YE command is executed the connection is dropped 3 14 IM 04L05A01 17E 3 7 Using Barcode Input Connecting the Barcode Reader Follow the operating procedures for the barcode reader that you are using Procedure Connecting the Barcode Reader to the DXP 1 Turn OFF the DXP and connect the barcode reader to the RS 232 interface connector Turn ON the DXP The DXP is ready to receive commands Controlling the DXP Using the Barcode Reader Explanation Commands That Can Be Used Parameter Description BV Enters characters This command is valid when the cursor is at an item that requires character strings to be entered or when a window for entering character strings is displayed However passwords cannot be entered BB Sets batch number and lot number Enter this command when the DXP is in operation mode to enter the batch number and lot number BC Sets batch comment Enter this command when the DXP is in operation mode to enter a batch comment BJ Writes arbitrary message Enter this command while measure
137. ded on models with the optional code C3 O ele log flog fof IM 04L05A01 17E Names and Uses of Parts Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys This section will describe the basic flow of operation when changing the settings of the DXP using the front panel keys Entering the System Mode Note e Settings related to communications are configured in the system mode e You can enter the system mode only if you log in as a registered administrator 1 Press the MENU key to display the engineering mode menu Note You cannot enter the engineering mode when Memory Start is in progress when the sign record screen is displayed when saving data to an external storage medium or when there is data that has not been saved to the external storage medium Memory Start in progress is a condition in which measured computed data is being acquired to the internal memory and the operation of automatically storing data to the external storage medium is in progress 2 Press the soft key corresponding to System Mode A dialog box that asks you whether or not the new settings are to be stored 3 Select Yes or No and press the DISP ENTER key The system mode menu appears Noe eee If an external storage medium is not inserted when you
138. dedicated command eceeeee 5 6 5 38 RS 422A 485 dedicated response eeceeceseereeeeeeeeeeees 6 5 RS 422A 485 interface Specification eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 1 IM 04L05A01 17E Index 3 Index RS 422A 485 interface terminal ccccccccesseceeseeeesseeeeees v S etereo alo FE le AE T sender sender URL x serial interface CONVeErter ssseesiissseieesieerrrssrrrnerrreerrrsseni 3 8 serial interface specification 2 0 eee ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeneees 3 1 server name setting command control eee eee eerie 5 18 5 21 setting command engineering mode s s s 5 3 5 10 setting command system mode eeeeeeeeee 5 4 5 18 setting function setting measurement function 1 11 setting function setting measurement server setting measurement FUNCTION 0 eect eee eeeeeeee setting measurement Server ou ee eee eee eeeeeeeeeeee signal direction ee signal name RS 232 signal name RS 422A 485 single negative response ou eee cee eee esse eeeeeteeeeeaeeneees SMTP server SNIP cains SNTP cli nt ir a aera d SNTP S6rVeP arsaa none n aeae aaea aaea SNTP synched to start SOMK CY csicschcctsceteet A i Space COG eeeceeeeteceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeseeeeeteneeeteeaeeeess special data value eeeceeeseeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaee special MESSAGE ceecceecseseeses
139. des measurement channels set to skip and computation channels set to Off Click Refresh to refresh the data Refresh Close Creation date Jul 23 2001 11 56 18 Alarm status i TI 001 H 62 6 C TI 002 Rr 26 9 c FI 001 53 26 l min Displaying the log Displays the message log error log FTP log Web operation log e mail log setting change log and SNTP log Click Refresh to refresh the data An example of the log message log Eole MESSAGE Selects log type Refreshes screen Refresh Glose Creation date Jul 23 2001 11 57 05 red material 2 ABC2001 Solgan material 1 ABC2001 Sed start ABC2001 Contents of the operator page See a display example in section 1 1 On the operator page the following operations can be carried out in addition to the information available on the monitor page Operations using the DISP ENTER key and arrow keys You can use the DISP ENTER key and arrow keys on the operator page to carry out the same operations as the DISP ENTER key and arrow keys on the DXP However Alarm ACK operation cannot be performed on individual alarms on the overview display Switching trend digital and bar graph displays Switch the screen on the DXP by specifying the group that will display the trend numerical or bar graph display 2 38 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 11 Using the Web Server Using the Monitor Page Procedure This section gives an o
140. dvecieatiina 3 9 bit structure of the status information ccceeeee 7 1 7 2 block measured computed FIFO data cceeee 6 25 block member 10 60 51 gt eee Ce CAD Orsi sices cede Sescdakd shsciead E E iiveeestte 3 5 cable Connection procedure eee eeeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeees 3 5 calculating the SUM value eee cece cess eeeeeteeeeeaeeeeaes 6 4 canceling operation carriage return COE eee seeeseceeeseersneeeseesenerseneeaeeesee App 1 character number input key cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeee iv checking the Connection Status ccceeeeseeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 2 9 command IM 04L05A01 17E Index 1 command instrument information server ae command Modbus master csceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees command name command syntax COMMANG FESPONSE 0 ee eee eee eeee ects e eee eeaeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeaeeneaes 6 1 commands that can be used barcode input 0 3 15 commands that can be used maintenance test server 2 56 commands that can be used setting meas server 2 23 COMMUNICATION Condition cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeeeeeeeaees 4 13 COMMUNICATION distance eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteneeeees 3 1 communication timeout 1 3 1 8 2 16 conceptual diagram BINARY ceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeees 6 2 configuring the Ethernet interface c
141. e DXP belongs 15 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Default gateway box For DX100P confirm the new settings pressing the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Setting the DNS Domain Name System Set the DNS if you are using a host name to specify the destination server of the file transfer on an FTP client or the server of the e mail recipient If the DNS is not going to be used go to step 38 for models with the serial communication function or step 40 for models without the serial communication function For the DX100P when settings are confirmed by step 15 press the ESC key to return to the communication function setting menu and then press the 2 Ethernet DNS soft key to display the communication DNS menu e Select whether or not to use the DNS ON OFF 16 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the DNS On Off box Default gateway Tae DNS On Off oft Qarar caarsh ardor 17 Press either the On or Off soft key When using the DNS select ON and perform steps 18 through 37 Otherwise select Off you can skip steps 18 through 37 On Off a Setting the primary DNS server address 18 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Primary box under server search order Server search order _ Primary D B B 8 Secondary
142. e LCD brightness and the screen backlight saver When the screen backlight saver function is OFF Syntax SQ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl LCD brightness DX100P 1 to 8 DX200P 1 to 4 p2 Screen backlight saver function ON OFF OFF Query SQ Example Set the LCD brightness to 2 and the screen backlight saver function to OFF SQ 2 0FF When the screen backlight saver function is ON Syntax SQ pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl LCD brightness DX100P 1 to 8 DX200P 1 to 4 p2 Screen backlight saver function ON OFF ON p3 Time after which to enable the screen saver function 1MIN 2MIN 5MIN 10MIN 30MIN 1H p4 Factors that causes the screen to return from the saver mode KEY KEY ALM Query SQ Example Set the LCD brightness to 2 the screen backlight saver function to ON the time after which to enable the screen backlight saver function to 1MIN and the factor that causes the screen to return from the saver mode to KEY SQ 2 ON 1MIN KEY SU Sets the USER key Syntax SU pl lt terminator gt pl Key action NONE No action ALARMACK Alarm acknowledge MANUALSAMPLE Manual sampling MESSAGE1 Write message MESSAGE2 Write message MESSAGE3 Write message MESSAGE4 Write message MESSAGE5 Write message MESSAGE6 Write message MESSAGE7 Write message any Dn wo FF UU N Be MESSAGE8 Write message SNAPSHOT Snapshot of the screen MATHSTART STOP Start Stop MATH MATHRESET Reset MATH Query SU Example Set the key action to the sna
143. e executed when data p8 The group number 1 to 4 to display acquisition is in progress However if the in the upper right quadrant of the operation of changing date and time when divided screen screen 3 data acquisition is in progress is enabled see p9 The display item of the lower right the RC command this command can be quadrant of the divided screen executed even when data acquisition is in screen 4 same as the selections progress for p3 This command cannot be executed when data pl0 The group number 1 to 4 to display is being saved to an external storage medium in the lower right quadrant of the divided screen screen 4 BE Saves the setup data for the Query SY pl engineering mode Example Set the four panel display number to 1 Syntax BE pl lt terminator gt four panel display name to 4DISPLAY1 the pl Store or discard the settings STORE display item of panel 1 to trend display ABORT the group number to display in panel 1 to Example Store the engineering mode settings 1 the display item of panel 2 to digital BE STORE display the group number to display in Description When this command is executed the DXP panel 27ko 2 the display item of panel 3 returns to the operation mode to bar graph display the group number to When settings are changed this command displ y in panel 3 0 lt 37 the display item cannot be executed unless the external of panel 4 to Message summary display storage medium is inserted to the
144. e for transferring data it is necessary for equipment on both sides to agree on a set of rules to ensure the proper transfer of data The set of rules is called handshaking Because there are many handshaking methods that can be used between the instrument and the PC one must make sure that the same method is chosen by both the DXP and the PC You can choose any of the four methods shown in the following table Table of Handshaking Methods Cindicates that it is supported Handshaking method Data Transmission Control Control used to send data to a PC Data Reception Control Control used to receive data from a PC Software handshaking Hardware handshaking Stops transmission when X OFF is received Resume when X ON is received Stops transmission when CB CTS is false Resume when it is true No handshaking Software handshaking Hardware handshaking Send X OFF when the received data buffer is 3 4th filled Send X ON when the received data buffer becomes 1 4th filled Set CA RTS to False when the received data buffer is 3 4th filled Set to True when the received data buffer becomes 1 4th filled No handshaking OFF OFF Data transmission control There is no handshaking between the DXP and the PC The X OFF and X ON signals are treated as data and the CS signal is ignored e Data reception control There is no handshaking between the DXP and the PC When the
145. e operation is error for all users at fixed length FI 0 error 5 All errors FI 0 error2 5 Errors 200 to 299 The operation log saved in the DXP is extracted according to the specified conditions and output e If p2 is omitted all users are specified e If more than 5 users are specified for p2 users after the 5th user are invalid e If the p2 is delimited using without specifying users designations after the 5th user are invalid e If p3 is omitted all operations are specified If more than 5 items are specified for p3 items after the 5th item are invalid e If the p3 is delimited using without specifying items designations after the 5th item are invalid e Parameter p4 can be omitted e If the following operation is specified a number can be specified after the operation e Error e Warning Outputs status information IS pl lt terminator gt pl 0 Fixed Output status information Is 0 The output status can be masked using the status filter IF command Outputs user information FU pl lt terminator gt pl Output information 0 Output user information 1 Output the detailed user information of all users logged in 2 Output the simplified user information of all users logged in Example Output user information FU 0 Description Outputs the information of the user currently connected to the DXP IM 04L05A01 17E 5 37 spuewwog 5 8 RS 422A 485 Dedicated Commands
146. ects the communication interface used to S Yes No 5 21 output files on the external storage medium using ME command XG Sets the time zone S Yes No 5 21 XP Sets the date and time for the memory timeup S Yes No 5 21 BR Sets the system relays S Yes No 5 22 YA Sets the IP address subnet mask and default S Yes No 5 22 gateway YK Sets keepalive S Yes No 5 22 YN Sets the DNS S Yes No 5 22 YQ Sets the communication timeout S Yes No 5 22 EQ Sets the user that can use the communication S Yes No 5 23 input data YS Sets the serial interface S Yes No 5 23 YT Sets the files to be transferred using FTP S Yes No 5 23 client YG Sets whether or not to use the Web server S Yes No 5 23 YL Sets the Modbus master Yes No 5 23 YM Sets the commands for Modbus master Yes No 5 23 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 2 A List of Commands Command Function Execution Mode Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function YU Sets the contents of the e mail S Yes No 5 24 YV Sets the recipient s address S Yes No 5 24 YW Sets the sender s address S Yes No 5 25 YX Sets the SMTP server S Yes No 5 25 EF Sets the FTP client S Yes No 5 25 EG Sets the Web server S Yes No 5 25 RG Sets the time deviation limit S Yes No 5 25 XC Sets the cyclical use of the storage area S Yes No 5 25 of the external storage medium Media FIFO RC Enables Disables setting changes when data S Yes No 5 25 acquisition is in progress WA Sets the SNTP server function S Yes No 5 25 WB Sets the SNTP
147. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeseaeeseeeteaeeseeeeeaeess 5 38 Response 6 1 Response Syntax Measurement Server ceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeeeaeeeeetaas 6 1 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Da Ae a aee ane ree raae raaa raonar raea Ernano NeR Arinan ai niiae i inna 6 6 6 3 Output Format of BINARY Datta ecceeeceseeeecseeeeeeeeneeceaeeeeeseaeeeeeseaeesaeseaeesieeeneeeaees 6 25 Status Report 7 1 The Bit Structure of the Status Information ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeneeeeas 7 1 72 gt Otat s Information and Filter presionirei dietas isea Maoti e eda oa a aiaiai 7 3 Appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes sseeseeseeseeeeeeteeesirstitttestttinstnstrttinstnntrnetnntnntnnnen nenn App 1 Appendix 2 Output Flow of FIFO Datta eseseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeiretretiesttstintnsttttinstnstnnrnstrsrneensens App 2 Appendix 3 Output Flow of the File or the File List in the External Storage Medium App 4 Appendix 4 Login Process and Messages during the Login Process esceesseeeereeees App 6 Appendix 5 Data Dropout Modbus Master 0 0 eeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeaeeeseneeeeenaeeeeegs App 9 Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages eseeesceeeesneeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeeesenaeeeeeeeeeneaeeeesaeeeseneeeen App 10 IM 04L05A01 17E Chapter 1 Overview of the Communication Functions 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface This section describes the communi
148. eeeseecssnerseeseaeseseeeeneteseeseaes starting stopping e mail transmissions T EIVERE S E h E T status information 0 00 cee cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeteneeeees status report storing operation sub delimiter SUDNMOL MASK eye sisendina eaa eaid a a EAE aE aie T terminator nosine a aa E A iiri time difference from GMT UMS OU eranan nanei Seia TAN Oene E A AREA ba KEREI tee tIMO OUT TIM 0 220 026 iiaiai eadi transferring files FTP client type Modbud resister data type of ASCII data type of BINARY data ccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeteeneeeees U UDP e a E E E WINE Ke A ae A EEE EA TET A ET UINT32_B UINT32_L Ue of Pall enyire eai aa user that is to use the communication input data i USEF INFOPMALION 0 0 eeeeeeecceeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeteaeeees ser IOCK EC isi cotecsccevaceecdecessescedeorbesnidessentecterssnevsedeses USOF NAME 2 2 2ted oncataebewe pda tienda dt Web server web Server 0 Web Server Setting 0 0 c cece cee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeseeeeaeeeneeees 2 32 Index 4 IM 04L05A01 17E
149. eesieeeeaeeeneeesas 1 13 Chapter 2 Using the Ethernet Interface 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 2 9 2 10 2 11 2 12 2 13 2 14 2 15 2 16 2 17 Ethernet Interface Specifications eeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeceeeeaeeeaeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeenereas 2 1 Connecting the Ethernet Interface ecceeeeceeeceeeeeeeneeseaeeeeeeseaeesaeeeaeeteaeeeaeeseaeeseeeeaeensaes 2 2 Configuring the Ethernet Interface ecceeecceeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeseaeeteaeesieeenaeenaaes 2 3 Checking the Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface cccccceessseeeeeteeeeeteeeeees 2 9 Setting the F TP Clientic sc 4e 0s ta donde ein Wa Agia iak edd 2 10 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data oi seis ees hs eo ie ae ee A Ait ee de hes et et delet 2 16 Using the Setting Measurement Server c ccceceeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeneeeeeatens 2 19 Using the FTP Servers iia or Alesina del eh led a eee 2 26 Using the FTP Cliente menneet ens a eE AE OAO E EEE A EES 2 29 Setting the Web Server Function ceecceeececeseeeeeeteeeeeeeseaeecaeeeaeesaeeeaeeseaeeseeseaeeeeeeeas 2 32 Using the Web Server snoin epinio eia a Ea EAA NE EN E EE 2 36 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function cecceesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesneeeeaeesneeesas 2 42 Using the E Mail Transmission Function s sssesseeseseeressrserireerirnsirrsrirnsrirn
150. efresh to refresh the measured computed data Click Close to close the measured computed data window Displaying the log Click Log in the display menu section to display the log Click the box used to select the log type The selected type of log is displayed Click Refresh to refresh the log information Click Close to close the log window IM 04L05A01 17E 2 39 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 11 Using the Web Server Using the Operator Page This section gives an overview of the operations Follow the operating procedures on your PC Procedure Start the browser and open the operator page of the DXP The following operations are the same as the monitor page See Using the Monitor Page Entering the user name and password Auto refreshing the display Refreshing the display manually Zooming in or out of the display Displaying the alarm summary Displaying measured computed data Displaying the log The followings are the operations only on the operator page Switching trend digital and bar graph displays Click Select group of the trend digital or bar graph display in the display switch section to select the group The DXP screen changes to the specified display The operator page is also refreshed TREND Select Group gt Operating using the DISP ENTER key and arrow keys Click the DISP ENTER key or arrow keys that are displayed on the operator page to operate the DXP in the same fa
151. eport is created the DXP transfers the report data to the FTP server as a file e Screen image data file When Snap shot is executed Snap shot executed using the FUNC key User key communication command EV2 or via the remote control Note For the format of the report file see appendix 2 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IMO04L05A01 01 E IM04L06A01 01E e Ifa file with the same name exists at the destination the name of the report file or screen image data file is changed at the last character 8th character and transferred see Display data event data which acquisition is in progress in Note above Primary FTP Server and Secondary FTP Server The DXP transfers files to the primary FTP server When the primary FTP server is down the data are transferred to the secondary FTP server Note If the file transfer to both primary and secondary servers fails the DXP aborts the file transfer e Display data event data files setup setting change log files and report files that had failed transmission are transmitted along with the new data files when the connection with the FTP server recovers However the maximum number of files that can be held in the transfer waiting condition when transmission fails is a total of 20 for display data event data files and setup setting change log files and 50 for report files When the number of files exceeds this number the retransmission is cancelled from the oldest file Scree
152. er respectively Connected function SET Setting function MON Monitor function User type ADMIN1 to ADMIN3 Administrator 1 to administrator 3 USERO1 to USER90 User 1 to user 90 All spaces if the login function is not used or when using serial communications DXP mode OPE Operation mode ENG Engineering mode SYS System mode Whether the logged in user is specified to use the communication input data C Specified as a user to use the communication input data D Space Not specified as a user to use the communication 2 input data S Space E U uchiyama MON USERO1 OPE C EN When p1 1 Outputs the name and login information of all users that are logged in Syntax EACRLF nnCRLF ppp_uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuCRLF ENCRLF nn PPP The number of users logged in Login information KEY Login using keys MSR Login to the setting function via the Ethernet interface ms_ Login to the monitor function via the Ethernet interface _ Underscore FTP Login using FTP client TST Login to the setting function of the maintenance test server IM 04L05A01 17E 6 23 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data ts_ Login to the monitor function of the maintenance test server _ Underscore SRL Logs in via the serial interface uuu u User name fixed to 20 characters Space Example EA 03 KEY UCHIYAMA ms_ TSUCHIYA ms_ YOSHINO EN When p1 2 Outputs the number of users that are
153. er the settings FC Syntax Example Description FE Syntax Example Description FD Syntax Example Description Outputs screen image data FC pl lt terminator gt pl Outputs screen image data GET Outputs screen image data from the DxP FC GET Obtains the screen image data of the current screen and outputs the data in PNG format Outputs decimal position unit information and setup data FE pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Output data type 1 Decimal position and unit information 3 Decimal and unit information of the most recent TLOG value 4 Setup data file p2 First channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 9 p3 Last channel number DX100P 01 to 12 3 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 2 Output the decimal position and unit a information of channel 1 through 5 from the DXP FE 0 01 05 Set the parameters for the first and last channel numbers so that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 1 or3 Outputs the most recent measured computed data FD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Output data type 0 Output the most recent measured computed data in ASCII format 1 Output the most recent measured computed data in binary format 4 Output the most recent TLOG data in ASCII format 5 Output the most recent TLOG data in binary format 6 Output the relay status p2 Firs
154. eration Note The operation of time correction varies depending on whether data acquisition is in progress For details see section 1 10 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 1 7 SUO I JIUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD y JO M IM AQ 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface Maintenance Test Server For a description of how to use this function see section 2 14 Setting Function and Monitor Function The following two functions are available e Setting Function e Output Ethernet communication information such as connection information and network information from the DXP e Forcibly disconnect other users connected to the DXP e Monitor Function Output Ethernet communication information such as connection information and network statistics from the DXP Dedicated Commands Uses dedicated commands for the DXP See chapter 5 Login To use the maintenance test server log into the setting function or monitor function by entering a user name user ID and password that are registered in the DXP Communication Timeout This function drops the connection if no data transfer is detected between the PC and the DXP for 15 minutes Instrument Information Server Other Functions The serial number and model of the DXP connected to Ethernet can be output For the operating procedure see section 2 15 Confirming the Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface The connection status o
155. erinssrnnsrrene 2 51 Using the Maintenance Test Server cecceesceseceeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeteeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeaeeseaeeseeeteaeens 2 54 Using the Instrument Information Server ecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeeteaeeseeeteaeens 2 57 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function eecceeceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeees 2 59 Using the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function 0 e eee eee eee eeeeees 2 63 IM 04L05A01 17E Contents Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Appendix Index Using the Serial Interface C2 C3 Options 3 1 Serial Interface Specifications ee eecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeseeeeeaeeeeeeesieeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeas 3 1 3 2 RS 232 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement and Signal Names the Connection Procedure and Handshaking ccccccceccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseeeueeeeeessesaees 3 2 3 3 RS 422A 485 Interface Pin Arrangement Signal Names and the Connection POCCQUIG iis arpista aarti eee teen Ate alates aut ae oleae ade wee 3 5 3 4 The Bit Structure of One Character and the Operation of the Receive Buffer 3 9 3 5 Configuring the Serial Interface 0 2 00 eecceeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseaeesaeeseeeesaaeeeaeeteeeneeeaeees 3 10 3 6 Using the Setting Measurement Function eee eee cece eee cee cee eeee sees tae teases eeeeeeeenaes 3 13 3 7 Using Barcode Inputisies s
156. eriodically retrieving data from the DXP at a rate determined by the processing power of the measurement PC For the output flow of FIFO data see appendix 4 EE Switches the mode from the operation mode Syntax EE pl lt terminator gt pl Mode ENG Engineering mode SYS System mode 5 28 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 6 Control Commands Example Switches to the engineering mode EE ENG Description This command cannot be executed when data acquisition is in progress However if the operation of changing the settings when data acquisition is in progress is enabled see the RC command this command can be executed even when data acquisition is in progress e This command cannot be executed when the sign record screen is displayed e This command cannot be executed when data is being saved to an external storage medium e This command cannot be executed when there is data that has not been saved to the external storage medium e Can be executed even when data acquisition is in progress if the login function is not being used UD Switches the screen Refreshing the screen Syntax UD pl lt terminator gt pl Switching the screen 0 Example Refresh the screen UD 0 Changing to 1 panel display only for DX200P Syntax UD pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Switching the screen 1 p2 Display item TREND Trend display DIGITAL Digital display BAR Bar graph display OVERVIEW Overview display Alarm indicator ALARM Alarm summary displ
157. erminator When using a multidrop connection including a point to point connection connect a terminal resistance to the DXP on the end of the chain Do not connect a terminal resistance to a DXP in the middle of the chain In addition turn the terminator on the host computer ON see the computer s manual If a converter is being used turn ON its terminator An external terminator must be attached to the recommended converter However there are converters that have built in terminations IM 04L05A01 17E 3 4 The Bit Structure of One Character and the Operation of the Receive Buffer The Bit Structure of One Character The serial interface on the DXP communicates using start stop synchronization With the start stop synchronization a start bit is added every time a character is transmitted The start bit is followed by the data bits parity bit and stop bit See the figure below Circuit back to idle state 1 character dotted line or the start bit of the next data Circuit idle state Data bits 7 or 8 bits solid line Parity bit Start bit Even odd or none Stop bit 1 or 2 bits Receive Buffer and Received Data The data received from the computer are first placed in the receive buffer of the DXP Depending on the available free space in the receive buffer the received data are processed as shown in the figure below When the receive buffer becomes FULL overflow data are discarded 2047 bytes I l
158. ernet Interface Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 1 Ethernet IP Address DX100P or 1 Ethernet Serial DX200P soft key to display the communication Ethernet serial menu DX100P Communication Ethernet menu DX200P Communication Ethernet Serial menu Ethernet IP_Address Ethernet p Serial e eeraa o 0 B 0 IP address B B B Baud rate 9628 bps 5 Subnet mask o 8 8 8 Subnet mask a 0 8 6 s Data lensth 8 bit Default gateway a 8 Default gateway a o amp g s Parity Even js DNS On Off Off a RS 232 Server search order z Handshakins off 0ff z Primary 8 8 2B RS 42207485 4 Secondary 6 g s Address i d Host_nane a Protocol Normal z z Donain nane Henory out Ethernet Donain suffix search order unnununnnpuunnnnnn nd Primary pme Secondary These setting items are not displayed for the models without the serial communication function C2 or C3 Setting the IP address 4 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the IP address bo
159. essages You can simplify the login procedure by entering the user name or the user name and user ID using barcodes e You can operate individual keys You can execute the output of measured computed data logs and other types of data c t a a r Displaying Error Communication FTP Web operation E mail logs The operation log can be displayed on the following log screens Operation log screen A log of operations Error log screen A log of operation errors Setting change log screen A log of setting changes Communication log screen A log of commands and responses executed using the setting measurement server function For the operating procedure to display the log screen see section 8 9 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Overview of the Configuration For the setting procedure see sections 3 5 4 4 and 4 5 IM 04L05A01 17E SUO I IUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD 3y JO M IM AQ Chapter 2 Using the Ethernet Interface Ethernet Interface Specifications 2 1 Basic Specifications Electrical and mechanical specifications Conforms to IEEE 802 3 Ethernet frames conform to the DIX specifications Transmission medium type 10BASE T Protocol TCP IP UDP ICMP ARP Server Functions and Client Functions Server Functions and the Maximum Number of Connections The following table indicates the maximum number of connections and the port number for each functio
160. external storage medium ME Conceptual diagram 1 byte pe fe em r Jason BINARY header Data length Header sum BINARY BINARY data BINARY data BINARY footer 2 bytes EBCRLF Indicates that the data are BINARY Data length The byte value of flag identifier header sum BINARY data data sum Note Oe The data length of the BINARY header section is output according to the byte order specified with the BO command 6 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 1 Response Syntax Header sum The sum value of data length flag identifier during serial communications Note On the Ethernet network checksum is carried out automatically in the TCP IP layer Therefore Header sum and Data sum are not used Their values are fixed to 0 BINARY data For the output format of various data types see section 6 3 Data sum The sum value of BINARY data during serial communications Flag Bit Name abbreviation Flag Meaning of the flag 0 1 7 BO MSB LSB Output byte order 6 CS No Yes Existence of a check sum on the serial communications only 5to1 0 END Middle End Inthe middle or at the end of the continuous data e When the BO flag is 0 the data length and output data are output MSB first When the BO flag is 1 the data is output LSB first If the check sum is enabled parameter 1 using the CS command parameter on the serial communications each sum value is inserted in the header sum a
161. f the Ethernet interface can be confirmed on the rear panel and on the screen of the DXP e For the display position and the meaning of the indicator see section 2 4 Displaying Operation Error FTP Communication E mail Web operation SNTP logs The operation log can be displayed on the following log screens e Operation log screen A log of operations Error log screen A log of operation errors Setting change log screen A log of setting changes Communication log screen A log of commands and responses executed using the setting measurement server function FTP log screen A log of file transfers that were executed using the FTP client function Web operation log screen A log of operations on the Web pages E mail log screen A log of e mail transmissions SNTP log screen A log of access to the SNTP server For the operating procedure to display the log screen see section 8 9 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM 04L05A01 17E 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface Overview of the Configuration The communication functions of the DXP can be used by setting the DXP according to the following figure Ethernet settings Ethernet interface Keepalive timeout communication input FTP client Web server E mail transmission SNTP server SNTP client Ref Sections 2 3 2 6 2 5 2 10 2 12 2 16 Functions Rela
162. f you select Off go to step 20 On Off ee ag e Selecting whether or not to use the access control 10 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Access control box Page type Operator On Off on Access control Off 11 Press either the On or Off soft key If you select On go to step 12 If you select Off go to step 20 On Off ee ag e Setting the user name 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the User name box Access control On _ User name Password 13 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box 14 Inthe box enter the user name 15 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the User name box e Setting the password 16 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Password box Access control On User name Password _ 17 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box C 18 In the box enter the password 19 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Password box 2 34 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 10 Setting the Web Server Function Monitor page Selecting whether or not to use the monitor page 20 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the On Off box Web Use Not Use Page type On Off Off 21 Press either the On or Off soft key If you select On go to step 22 If you select Off go to step 25 On Off amp Selecting whether or not to use the access contro
163. fications Terminal block type 6 point terminal block terminal screws ISO M4 nominal length 6 mm Electrical mechanical Conforms to EIA 422A RS 422A and EIA 485 RS 485 standards specifications Connection Multidrop Four wire type 1 32 Two wire type 1 31 Communication Half duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select 7 or 8 bits Parity Select odd even or none Stop bit 1 bit fixed Received buffer size 2047 bytes Escape sequence Open and close Electric characteristics FG SG SDB SDA RDB RDA six points SG SDB SDA RDB and RDA terminals and the internal circuit of the DXP is functionally isolated FG terminal is the frame ground Communication distance Up to 1 2 km Terminator External recommended resistance 120 Q 1 2 W 3 1 suondo 9 Z3 e9e 19 U jenas y Huisn B 3 2 RS 232 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement and Signal Names the Connection Procedure and Handshaking Connector Pin Arrangement and Signal Names Connector pin arrangement o Rear panel OW Rf Pin No Signal Name Signal Meaning 2 RD Received Data Received data from the PC Input signal 3 SD Send Data Send data to the PC Outpu
164. following cases e Log out by sending a command Send the CC command e When a command for exiting the system mode is executed If you log into the setting function and initialize the setup data EC command or exit the system mode settings YE command you are logged out e Log out according to the auto logout setting of the DXP When logged into the setting function and no commands are sent for the time specified for the auto logout setting see section 4 4 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual you are automatically logged out e When forcibly disconnected from the maintenance test server The maintenance test server can drop the connection of other devices using the close command see section 2 14 e Log out according to the communication timeout setting See Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 e When a communication error occurs When a transmission error reception error or timeout of the keep alive function see Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 occurs you are logged out Note _____ If you log out from the setting function the DXP returns to the operation mode screen logged out condition IM 04L05A01 17E 2 25 e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 8 Using the FTP Server Required Settings Follow the procedures below to use the FTP server function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication
165. fter the specified number of retrials the DXP stops sending commands to the slave device Select the number of retrials from the following Off 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 and 20 Setting the command The commands are used to read data from slave devices at the read cycle and put them to the communication input data of the DXP Data from the consecutive registers with the same type of data in a slave device can be read and put to the consecutive communication input data of the DXP using a command e Turning On Off the command Turn On the command registration line to be used Up to eight commands can be registered IM 04L05A01 17E suondo 9 Z9 snqpow y Buisn B 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master Function Read channel start CH end CH Specify which communication input data will be assigned the data that is read from the slave device DX100P C01 to C12 DX200P C01 to C30 Communication input Registers in slave Registers in slave data of the DXP device A device B Modbus master coi 30001 30001 Two registers are used co2 30002 30002 for a 32 bit datum C30 Address Specify the address of the slave device from the following 1 to 247 Register Specify the register number of the slave device 32 bit data is assigned to two registers Thus specify the smaller register number see Type below Input register 30001 to 39999 30000
166. g ON OFF Relay setting OFF p7 Relay number DX100P I01 to 106 DX200P I01 to I06 I1l to I16 121 to 126 I31 to 136 Query SA pl p2 Example Set an upper limit alarm alarm value 1000 in alarm number 1 of channel 02 and activate relay number 1 when an alarm occurs SA 02 1 ON H 1000 0N I01 Description When the input range setting SR command is set to SKIP p3 cannot be turned ON e When the computation channel setting SO command is turned OFF p3 cannot be turned ON The alarm settings are all turned OFF for the following cases e When the input type is changed VOLT When the measurement range is changed IM 04L05A01 17E 5 11 spuewwog 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode When the span and scaling values are changed during scaling display includes changing the decimal position When the computation channel is turned ON OFF or when the computing equation or the span value is changed on the computation channel The h and settings of p4 are valid only when the measurement range is set to computation between channels If p4 is set to R or r set the interval for the upper lower limit on the rate of change using the XA command e Ifp4is set to T ort set the alarm delay time for the delay upper lower limit alarm using the BD command For the range of alarm values of p5 see the table in section 5 3 e Set the alarm value of a computation channel within the range of
167. g the SNTP client function 6 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Client settings Use Not box Client settings Use Not Use Seruer name I 7 Press the Use or Not soft key If you selected Use proceed to step 8 if you selected Not proceed to step 28 Use Not ee a e Setting the server name 8 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Server name box use Not _use Server nane _ ES Port number 192 9 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box 10 Inthe entry box enter the server host name or IP address 11 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Server name box 2 60 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 16 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Setting the port number 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Port number box yv ve lane i Port number Access interual th 13 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box C 14 In the entry box enter the port number of the SNTP server 15 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Port number box e Setting the access interval 16 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Access interval box FYL HUNP J l v Access interval Qerace rafaranea tima AMAA 17 Press the Off 1h 8h 12h or 24h soft key off 1h amp h 12h 24h D M TMT Setting the access reference time 18 Pres
168. gs in the table They are displayed on the FTP log screen of the DXP FTP logs can be output via the communication Code Message 280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280 Character String and Details HOSTADDR The DXP s IP address has not been specified Check the IP address DORMANT Internal processing error LINK Data link is disconnected Check the cable connection 281 FTP mail box operation error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281 Character String and Details MAIL Internal processing error STATUS Internal processing error TIMEOUT Internal processing error PRIORITY Internal processing error NVRAM Internal processing error 282 FTP control connection error Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed the DNS lookup search the IP address corresponding to the host name Check the DNS setting and the destination host name TCPIP Internal processing error UNREACH Failed to connect to a control connection server Check the address setting and that the server is running OOBINLINE Internal processing error NAME Internal processing error CTRL The control connection does not exist Check that the server does
169. gs must be stored 1 Pressing the End soft key in the system mode menu displays a dialog box that asks you whether or not the new settings are to be stored 2 To store the settings select Yes To not store the settings select No To return to the system mode menu select Cancel by pressing the arrow key and press the DISP ENTER key The system mode menu is the menu that is displayed when the ESC key is pressed several times after the parameters are changed Note If an external storage medium is not inserted when you select Yes an error message Media has not been inserted appears In this case the settings cannot be saved and the DXP cannot proceed to the system mode The error message is cleared by pressing ESC Insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry out the procedure again viii IM 04L05A01 17E Contents Forward 222 iaaiaee diaa aa aduanana a ea e l a a i delaedacuuste totes a i aaae a aTa i Howto Usethis Manual trosne siena ae a e aaa a aiaia cis a aaeeei ii Nam s and Uses of Parts ike ict i ect Sc A E SB le et a iv Chapter 1 Overview of the Communication Functions 1 1 1 2 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface 1 1 Functional Structure v2 2c eiseiee seiss dees esececiveeevlveciese tices ah eves need adeestieneucseeitineievevieleee 1 1 Connection to the Server Functions eecceesceseeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeceeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseaeeseeteaeeeeeeee
170. gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt lt gt Year Month Day Hour Minute Second Millisecond S Wtime Flag Measurement Computation Channel A2A1 A4A3 Measured data peaa Channel A2A1 A4A3 Computed data i 4 bytes Summer time or Winter time Block member Name BINARY value Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 Minute 0 to 59 Second 0 to 59 Millisecond 0 to 999 Summer Winter 0 1 Measurement Computation Channel OOH measurement 80H computation 01 to 60 Alarm status A1 Bi A2 Bi A3 Bi A4 Bi it O to 3 it 4 to 7 it O to 3 it 4 to 7 0to8 BINARY value 0 to 8 is entered in the upper and lower 4 bits of a byte 8 bits for the alarm status The binary values 0 to 8 correspond to H upper limit alarm L lower limit alarm h difference upper limit alarm difference lower limit alarm R upper limit on rate of change alarm r lower limit on rate of change alarm T delay upper limit alarm and t delay lower limit alarm as follows 0 no alarm 1 H 2 L 3 h 4 1 5 R 6 r 7 T and 8 t IM 04L05A01 17E 6 25 esuodsey fo 6 3 Output Format of BINARY Data e Flag The meaning of the flags are given on the table below The flags are valid during FIFO data output The flags are undefined for other cases Bit Flag Meaning of the flag 0 1 7 No Yes Indicates that the screen sna
171. he timer expires and set no action when timer expires XQ 1 RELATIVE 01 15 0N OFF This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 The timer expires at the interval specified by parameter p3 from the time the computation is started and performs the operation set with parameters p4 and p5 Sets the report type and generation time When report type is set to none RO pl lt terminator gt pl Report type OFF RO Set report to none RO OFF Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 For hourly daily and daily monthly reports RO pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt Syntax Query Example pl p2 p3 RO Report type HOUR DAY DAY MONTH Date of creation dd fixed form dd Day 01 to 28 Time of creation h h fixed form hh hour 00 to 23 Create a daily report at 9 o clock everyday Parameter p2 is invalid in this example RO DAY 05 09 Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 For daily weekly reports RO pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt Syntax Query pl p2 p3 RO Report type DAY WEEK Day of creation SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Time of creation hh fixed form hh hour 00 to 23 5 20 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode Example Create a daily report at 9 o clock everyday and a weekly report every Tuesday RO
172. he communication functions of the DX100P DX200P with the style number S5 e The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of continuing improvements to the instrument s performance and functions The figures given in this manual may differ from the actual screen e Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its contents However should you have any questions or find any errors please contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without YOKOGAWA s permission is strictly prohibited The TCP IP software used in this product and the documentation for that TCP IP software are based in part on BSD Networking Software Release 1 licensed from The Regents of the University of California e Microsoft MS DOS Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Modbus is a registered trademark of AEG Schneider Automation Incorporated Adobe Acrobat and PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems incorporated e For purposes of this manual the TM and symbols do not accompany their respective trademark names or registered trademark names e Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders e First edition September 2001 Fourth edition August 2004
173. he data The log of key operation and the remote control operation is output Up to 2000 operation logs are retained Logs that exceed 2000 are cleared from the oldest log Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss_xxxxxxxxxx_mmm_uuu u_ccc cCRLF ENCRLF J O n yy Year 00 to 99 3 gt mo Month 01 to 12 p dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 XXX t Operation 10 characters Login Logging in Logout Logging out UserLocked The user is invalidated MemStart Memory Start MemStop Memory Stop AlarmACK Releasing the alarm indication and output relay Message Writing a message Manual Manual sampling MathStart Starting the computation MathStop Stopping the computation MathReset Resetting the computation MathACK Clearing the computation dropout display Snapshot Saving the screen image MailStart Starting the e mail transmission MailStop Stopping the e mail transmission DispSave Saving the display data EventSave Saving the event data DispLoad Loading the display data EventLoad Loading the event data NewTime Newly set time TimeChg Setting the date and time using operation keys TimeAdj Adjusting the internal clock Clearl Executing Clear 1 Initialization IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Clear2 Executing Clear 2 Initialization Clear3 Executing Clear 3 Initialization TRevStart Starting time adjustment TRevEnd Ending time adjustment
174. icated in the table in section 5 3 When setting the scaling Syntax Query Example SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 p10 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Range mode SCALE p3 Input type VOLT DC VOLTAGE TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI Digital input p4 Measurement range p5 Lower limit of span p6 Upper limit of span p7 Scaling lower limit 30000 to 30000 p8 Scaling upper limit 30000 to 30000 p9 Scaling decimal position 0 to 4 p10 Unit Up to 6 characters SR pl Convert the DC voltage measured on channel 02 to a DC current Set the measurement range to 6 V span lower limit to 1 V span upper limit to 5 V scaling lower limit to 1 00 A and scaling upper limit to 5 00 A SR 02 SCALE VOLT 6V 1000 5000 100 500 2 A Description Set parameters p4 p5 and p6 according to the table in section 5 3 For parameters p5 and p6 enter a value using 5 digits or less excluding the decimal The decimal position is fixed to the position indicated in the table in section 5 3 For parameters p7 p8 and p9 either set all three parameters or omit all three parameters When setting the square root Syntax SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 p9 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Range mode SQRT p3 Measurement range p4 Lower limit of span p5 Upper limit of span p6 Scaling lower limit 5 10 IM
175. ici cccisccsesteace chee ets cease ceva tari esc enueeguee a E Aa E AET NS 3 15 Using the Modbus C2 C3 Options 4 1 Modbus Protocol Specifications 2 0 0 cecceeeceeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseeeseaeesneeenieeseaeeas 4 1 4 2 Register Assignments nri aie sia een ba elses eailites E beanies 4 2 4 3 Modbus Error Response Modbus Slave ccccsecceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeeeeeaas 4 3 4 4 Setting the Configuration that is Used When the Modbus Protocol is Used 0 4 4 4 5 Setting the Modbus Master FUNCTION eecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeaeeseeeseaeeteaeesaneraas 4 7 4 6 Checking the Operating Status of the Modbus Master FUnction ccesceseeneeereees 4 13 Commands 5 1 GommMand Syntax 206 400 een ee ee eatin ev Letts 5 1 5 2 SA Listo Command Sunsin Aa a eR pita Ae get 5 3 5 3 J Input Range Parameter enrio as tetas te ected lnc nets teas eesti 5 8 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode eccesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeseeeeeaeeseeeeeaeeseaeeneeeeaten 5 10 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode cccceecceeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeseeeesaeeeaeeseeeeeeeenaees 5 18 5 67 Gontro Commands irena n nir e Mahe ee nti ea eed 5 28 57 Qutput Commands seen ae a Ea e tabi ea ele eee 5 35 5 8 RS 422A 485 Dedicated Commands ceccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeaeeseaeeeeeeteaeeneeeeeatens 5 38 5 9 Maintenance Test COMMANAS c cceccceeeeeeeeeteeeeeee
176. ing message BJ Writes the specified character string message Set the batch name Command Function BB Sets the batch number and lot number 2 24 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server Using the Output Data The data retrieved from the DXP can be displayed in the following fashion File Data Location Extension Format Viewing Method Measured computed data Internal memory BINARY Create a software for displaying ASCII Create a software for displaying Log Internal memory ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software Setup data Internal memory Undisclosed Display using DAQSIGNIN 1 For a description of the output format see sections chapter 6 2 Measured computed data and TLOG data output by the FD command FIFO buffer data output by the FF command 3 Measured computed data and TLOG data output by the FD command 4 Create a program for displaying the data by referring to the output format described in this manual 5 Create a program for displaying the data by referring to the output format described in this manual Since the data is in ASCII format a commercially sold software can be used to view the data 6 Communication log FTP log error log operation log Web operation log E mail log alarm summary message summary setting change log and SNTP log output by the FL command Disconnecting from the DXP Logging Out You are logged out in the
177. ion Procedure Follow the procedures below to use the maintenance test server function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data Carry out the steps according to the PC software and network environment that you are using For a description of the procedures on the PC up to the step for logging into the DXP and the responses from the DXP see Using the Setting Measurement Server in section 2 7 For a description of the flow of the login process see appendix 4 Login Conditions Users that are registered in the DXP and are allowed to log in via communications can log into the setting function or monitor function e Only administrators can log into the setting function e An administrator or a user can log into the monitor function Only a single user can log in at any given time Note If you select a function setting or monitor when connecting to the DXP from the PC with no administrators registered the DXP returns E0 and is immediately ready to receive commands e If you select the setting function it is equivalent to logging into the setting function at the administrator level This is also true if you enter admin in place of setting e If you select the monitor function it is equivalent to logging into the monitor function at the user level This is also true if you enter user i
178. ious close When the primary FTP server is down the data are transferred to the secondary FTP server e FTP server name Set the FTP server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e When the DNS is being used the host name can be used to specify the server name e For DNS settings see section 2 3 e You can also specify the IP address In this case DNS is not necessary Port number Set the port number of the destination FTP server in the range from 1 to 65535 The default setting is 21 e Login name Set the login name to use when accessing the FTP server Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used e Password Set the password to use when accessing the FTP server Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used e Account Set the account the ID number to use when accessing the FTP server Up to 32 alphanumeric characters can be used e PASV mode When using the DXP behind a firewall that requires the PASV mode turn this mode On A firewall is a security feature on a router which is used to prevent undesired intrusion into the network from outside parties e Initial path Set the destination directory for the file transfer using up to 64 alphanumeric characters The directory delimiter varies depending on the FTP server Example When transferring files to the directory data which is a sub directory of the home directory on a UNIX file system use the forward slash as the directory delimiter home data 2 10
179. ipient for the e mail transmission test E Hai test C 3 Press the Recipient 1 or Recipient 2 soft key The e mail transmission test is executed for the selected recipient Repnt1 Repnt2 E IM 04L05A01 17E 2 51 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 13 Using the E Mail Transmission Function Starting Stopping E Mail Transmissions Explanation Starting Stopping e mail transmissions e Ifthe e mail transmission is started the e mail transmission function is activated e If the e mail transmission is stopped the e mail transmission function is disabled The e mail messages that have not been transmitted are cleared Note e If the DXP enters the system mode while the e mail transmission is started the e mail transmission is stopped If the DXP returns to the operation mode from the system mode the condition that existed before entering the system mode is resumed e Ifa e mail transmission fails the DXP retransmits the e mail twice at intervals of 30 seconds If all of the transmission fail the mail is discarded Conients of the e mail message The figure below shows an example of an e mail message Alarm e mail From DX good co jp Date Sun 24 Dec 2000 13 08 23 0900 JST Subject DX Alarm_summary Subject To user1 good co jp user2 good co jp LOOP1 Header 1 TEMPERATURE Header2 Alarm summary lt Host name gt DX lt CH gt 03 Channel no lt Type gt 1R Alarm no type
180. is derived by combining with the decimal position information that is output using the FE command Example If the value is 12 345 12345 is output in BINARY format BO Specifies whether to output the BINARY data MSB first or LSB first FE Outputs the decimal and unit information of the measured computed data This command is used when the data is output in BINARY format Output measured computed data at a specified interval The DXP outputs the data in the FIFO First In First Out buffer For a description of the FIFO buffer see appendix 2 Command Function FF Outputs the mantissa of the measured computed data in BINARY format The correct value is derived by combining with the decimal position information that is output using the FE command For an application example see appendix 2 Output Flow of FIFO Data BO See the description in Output the newest measured computed data FE See the description in Output the newest measured computed data Output status information For a description of the status information see chapter 7 Command Function IS Outputs the status information in ASCII format IF Sets the status filter Start Stop measurement and computation Command Function PS PSO Start measurement PS1 Stop measurement TL TLO Start computation TL1 Stop computation Write a message Command Function MS Writes the registered character str
181. is used to output the data A log of commands and responses is output Up to 200 logs are retained Logs that exceed 200 are cleared from the oldest data Syntax EACRLF yy mo dd_hh ENCRLF yy mo dd hh mi ss n uuuer u miz ss n_uuu ufd_mmm mCRLF Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Time 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Connection ID A number used to identify the connection 0 serial 1 or 2 Ethernet User name up to 20 characters For serial communications the user name is set to serial If no administrators are registered the user logged into Ethernet setting function is admin the user logged into Ethernet monitor function is user Multiple command flag Space single multiple If multiple commands are separated by sub delimiters and 6 8 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Example output at once x is displayed The multiple commands are divided at each sub delimiter and stored as individual logs 1 log for 1 command and 1 log for 1 response Input Output gt input lt output Message up to 20 characters Transmission The communication log contains only the error number and not the error message section Normally the transfer data are transmitted as they are but in some cases a special message is output The special messages are shown below Reception Ove
182. isplay 0 Yes No 5 30 data and saving the event data MS Writes the message display and save 0 Yes No 5 30 TL Starts stops resets computation MATH 0 Yes No 5 31 Clears the computation dropout status display EM Starts stops the e mail transmission function 0 Yes No 5 31 BB Sets the batch No ans lot No o Yes No 5 31 BC Sets the batch comment o Yes No 5 31 BQ Acknowledges user locked status fe Yes No 5 31 BJ Writes the free message o Yes No 5 31 CM Sets the communication input data O E Yes Yes 5 31 EJ Changes the password o Yes No 5 31 SD Sets the date and time O E Yes No 5 31 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 5 5 2 A List of Commands Command Function Execution Mode Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function BE Saves the setup data for the engineering mode E Yes No 5 32 SY Sets the 4 panel display only for DX200P O E Yes No 5 32 ME Outputs data saved in the external storage 0O E Yes No 5 32 medium Either Ethernet or serial communication can be used E Clears the measured computed data S Yes No 5 33 initializes the setup data YE Saves the setup data for the system mode S Yes No 5 33 cL Executes the time adjustment using E Yes No 5 33 the SNTP client function LO Loads the engineering mode settings E Yes No 5 33 LL Log in via the serial interface E Yes No 5 34 can only be used during serial communication Barcode Dedicated Commands BV Enters characters Oy Ey S LO 5 34 BP Enters the user name o
183. ister 4xxxx The master device can read the communication input data of the DXP that are written to the communication input data using function code 6 or 16 4 Reading the input register 3xxxx The master device loads the computed measured and time data of the DXP 6 Writing to the hold register 4xxxx The master device writes to the communication input data of the DXP 8 Loopback test Supports message return test code 0x00 2 in response to a loopback test by the master device 16 Writing to the hold register 4xxxx The master device writes to the communication input data of the DXP 1 Set the user using the communication input data to Serial see section 2 6 otherwise access to the hold register function codes 3 6 and16 are not allowed 2 Hexadecimal 00 Master Function Code Function Operation 3 Reading the hold register The DXP reads the hold register data 4XXXX 4XXXxx of another device and make it the communication input data Cxx 4 Reading the input register The DXP reads the input register data 3XXXX 3XXXXX of another device and make it the communication input data Cxx Note Set the user that uses the communication input data to Serial see section 2 6 otherwise Modbus mater function is not enabled IM 04L05A01 17E 4 1 suondo 9 Z3 snqpow y Buisn a 4 2 Register Assignments The register assignments of the Modbus protocol a
184. ition p3 is valid when the display direction of the bar graph is set to HORIZONTAL Use the SE command to set the display direction of the bar graph Sets the moving average of the measured channel SV pl1 p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Number of times to measure the moving average OFF 2 to 16 times SV pl Set the number of times to measure the moving average on channel 02 to 12 SV 02 12 This command can be used on models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and DX230P Sets the filter SF pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 04 DX200P 01 to 08 p2 Filter OFF 2S 5S 10S SF pl Set the filter on channel 02 to 2 s SF 02 2s An error occurs if a channel number other than those shown above is specified This command can be used on models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P Sets the channel display color SC pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Display color RED GREEN BLUE B VIOLET BROWN ORANGE Y GREEN LIGHTBLUE VIOLET GRAY LIME CYAN DARKBLUE YELLOW LIGHTGRAY PURPLE SC pl Set the display color of channel 02 to blue SC 02 BLUE Computation channels DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 can be configured on products with the computation function option M1 5 14 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode SQ Sets th
185. k environment that you are using This section describes the step by step procedures on the PC for logging in and the responses from the DXP For a description of the flow of the login process see appendix 4 Login Conditions Users that are registered in the DXP and are allowed to login via communications can log in An administrator or a user can log into the setting function However a user can only execute some of the control commands e Multiple users cannot log in simultaneously e If an administrator or user is already logged in using the keys on the DXP you cannot log into the setting function e Login is not possible if there is a user logged into the setting function via the serial interface An administrator or a user can log into the monitor function Up to two users can log in at once You cannot log in using the same user name Note ___ If you select a function setting or monitor when connecting to the DXP from the PC with no administrators registered the DXP returns E0 and is immediately ready to receive commands e If you select the setting function it is equivalent to logging into the setting function at the administrator level This is also true if you enter admin in place of setting e If you select the monitor function it is equivalent to logging into the monitor function at the user level This is also true if you enter user in place of monitor IM 04L05A01 17E 2 19
186. kcc_1ls_YY MO DD_HH MI SS _Ya Ma Da_ha ma sa_mmm_uuu uCRLF ENCRLF yy mo dd_hh mi ss Alarm occurrence time yy Year 00 to 99 mo Month 01 to 12 dd Day 01 to 31 hh Hour 00 to 23 mi Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 k Channel type 0 Measurement channel A Computation channel D cc Channel number 3 01 to 60 A 1 Alarm number 1 to 4 s Alarm type H h L 1 R r T t 01 to 60 YY MO DD_HH MI SS Alarm release time filled with spaces when the alarm is not released YY Year 00 to 99 MO Month 01 to 12 DD Day 01 to 31 HH Hour 00 to 23 MI Minute 00 to 59 ss Second 00 to 59 Ya Ma Da ha ma sa Alarm ACK time filled with spaces when the alarm ACK is not carried out yet or the alarm occurrence time when alarm ACK is not in use ya Year 00 to 99 Ma Month 01 to 12 Da Day 01 to 31 ha Hour 00 to 23 ma Minute 00 to 59 sa Second 00 to 59 mmm Operation type KEY Key operation REM Remote control MRS Setting function setting measurement server SRL Serial communications uuus su User name that carried out alarm ACK Up to 20 characters Space IM 04L05A01 17E 6 17 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Example EA 01 05 11 12 20 00 001 1L 01 05 11 12 25 00 01 05 11 12 25 00 KEY USER1234567890123456 01 05 11 12 30 00 A31 3t EN Message Summary The FL command is used to output the data The message summary is output Up to 250 messages are retained Messages that excee
187. l 22 Set whether use or not use the access control using the same method as steps 10 and 11 Setting the user name 23 Set whether use or not use the access control using the same method from steps 12 through 15 Setting the password 24 Set whether use or not use the access control using the same method from steps 16 through 19 Confirming Canceling the new settings 25 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi IM 04L05A01 17E 2 35 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 11 Using the Web Server Required Settings Follow the procedures below to use the Web server function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 10 Setting the Web Server Function Explanation This section describes how to display the monitor page and operator page and the operation on each page Browser application that can be used Operations have been confirmed on the following browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 0 to 6 0 Setting the URL Set the URL Uniform Resource Locator appropriately according to the network environment that you are using You can access the DXP by setting the URL as follows http host name domain name file name e http Prot
188. llowing values This setting is valid for the RS 422A 485 interface and the Modbus protocol 1 to 32 Selecting the protocol When using the setting measurement function select Normal When using the barcode input function select Barcode Memory out Select the communication type Ethernet communications or serial communications used to output the data on the external storage medium of the DXP using the ME command To use the serial communications select Serial 1 This command can be used on either the Ethernet communications or serial communications 2 When the login function is enabled any of administrators are registered the ME command cannot be used via the serial communications Selecting Serial causes no effect Storing the settings To activate the settings made in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings return to the previous values 3 10 IM 04L05A01 17E 3 5 Configuring the Serial Interface Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 6 Serial Memory out DX100P or 1 Ethernet Serial DX200P soft key to display the communication Serial menu DX100P Communication Serial Memory out menu DX200P Communication Ethernet
189. logged in by each login method Syntax EACRLF KMSTFmtCRLF ENCRLF K The number of users M The number of users serial interface 0 S The number of users T The number of users logged logged or 1 logged logged maintenance test server 0 F The number of users m The number of users serial interface 0 t The number of users logged logged to 2 logged maintenance test server 0 Example EA 1000020 EN in using keys 0 or 1 into the setting function via the in via the serial interface 0 or 1 into the setting function of the or 1 in using FTP client 0 to 2 into the monitor function via the into the monitor connection of the or 1 6 24 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 3 Output Format of BINARY Data Measured Computed Data and FIFO Data The FD command is used to output the measured computed data The FF command is used to output the FIFO data The ID number of the output format is 1 See Identifier on page 6 3 2 bytes 2 bytes gt Number of blocks Number of bytes XN BINARY data Block 1 XN The BINARY data section NG l on the Conceptual diagram Block n Ny on page 6 2 Number of blocks This is the number of blocks Number of bytes This is the size of one block in bytes Block 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 1 byte 2 bytes 1 byte 1 byte E gt lt gt lt gt lt
190. main suffix Set this value when the domain suffix is necessary Otherwise go to step 38 32 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Primary box under Domain suffix search order Domain suffix search order Primary Ganandarniu 33 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box CJ IM 04L05A01 17E 2 7 e u 4 Uu19443 ey uISN D 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 34 Enter the primary domain suffix in the entry box 35 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Primary box e Setting the secondary domain suffix Set this value when the secondary domain suffix exists If this setting is not necessary go to step 38 36 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Secondary box under Domain suffix search order Domain suffix search order Primary Secondary 37 Set the secondary domain suffix in the same fashion as in steps 33 to 35 Setting the Memory out The Memory out is displayed if the serial communication function is equipped 38 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Memory out box Henory out Ethernet 39 Press the Ethernet soft key Ethernet Serial ae Cc Confirming Canceling the new settings 40 Toconfirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings
191. mber of connections see section 2 1 2 setting or monitor 3 Enter the password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Spaces cannot be used Passwords used in the past are not allowed App 6 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 4 Login Process and Messages during the Login Process Messages during the Login Process An English error message is returned via the communication interface Codes other than 085 and 117 are not displayed on the DX100P DX200P screen Code Message and Description 085 The login password is incorrect The password is incorrect Check the password 117 This password is not effective The user is invalidated If the login operation is carried out with a wrong password for three consecutive times the user is invalidated From that point the user can no longer log in Clearing the user locked condition Administrators can clear the user locked condition For the procedure see section 6 1 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual 400 Input username Enter a user name that is registered in the DXP 401 Input password Enter the password 402 Select function from setting or monitor Specify the function to be connected setting or monitor 403 Login incorrect try again Login failed Restart from the user name 404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable Attempting to connect exceeding the number of simultaneous connections allowed setting f
192. mber of file lists to be output 1 to 100 All file lists in the specified directory are output when p3 is omitted Example Output the list of all files in the root directory ME DIR Output 10 files of the file list of the root directory ME DIR 10 Output the list of all files in the DATAO directory ME DIR DATAO Output the list of all display data files in the DATAO directory ME DIR DATAO DDS Output the data in the file 72615100 DDS in the DATAO directory ME GET DATA0 72615100 DDS Description Parameter p2 is valid when p1 is set to DIR or GET e Parameter p3 is valid when p1 is set to DIR This command can be used to output data over the communication interface Ethernet or serial that was selected with the XO command If an error occurs during data transmission p1 RESEND can be used to retransmit the data EC Clears the measured computed data initializes the setup data Syntax EC pl lt terminator gt pl Type of data to be cleared or initialized 0 Clear all measured computed data and initialize the setup data of the setting mode and basic setting mode Example Description YE Syntax Example Description CL Syntax Example Description LO Syntax Example Description al Clear all measured computed data and initialize the setup data of the setting mode 2 Clear all measured computed data Clear all measured computed data
193. ment is in progress memory start to enter arbitrary messages BP Makes login operation easier Enters the user name or the user name and user ID when logging in The password is entered using keys KE Operates individual key operations Operates in the same fashion as the key on the DXP is pressed Output commands All commands can be used BB BC and BJ commands are the same as for the setting measurement function BV KE and BP commands are commands dedicated to barcodes For details on commands see chapter 5 Usage The command encoded into barcodes is read by the barcode reader to control the DXP Operations that can be performed using keys of the DXP can be controlled However the limitation on the operation for each user is the same as for key operation If a user that is not allowed to perform the operation is logged in these commands cannot be executed see the note under Commands That Can Be Used When Logged into the DXP on the previous page Output commands can be executed regardless of the login condition Operation Log Operations are recorded in the DXP operation log IM 04L05A01 17E 3 15 suondo 9 Z3 e9e 19 U jenas y Huisn B 3 7 Using Barcode Input Barcode Reader Operations have been confirmed with barcode readers listed below e Model MS9540 RS with the RS 232 interface Manufacturer Metrologic Instruments Inc e Model LS1902T RS with the RS 2
194. message E1 401 Input password 5 Enter the default password User Default Password Administrator 1 Admin1 Administrator 2 Admin2 Administrator 3 Admin3 User 1 User01 User 2 User02 User 90 User90 The DXP returns the following message E1 407 Password has expired Please enter a new password 6 Enter a new password Note The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those specified by other users or those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified e Enter the password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Spaces cannot be used for the password The DXP returns the following message E1 408 Enter password again for confirmation IM 04L05A01 17E 2 21 eu u JOUJOYTy ey Busy D 2 7 Using the Setting Measurement Server 7 Enter the password you entered in step 6 The DXP returns the following message EO You are logged in Logging in after the First Time 1 6 Note The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those specified by other users or those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified Enter the password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Spaces cannot be used for the password Specify the destination DXP using a host name or IP address The port number 34260 is used to specify the setting measurement server The DXP returns the following message E
195. munication log screen For the procedures on how to display the communication log see section 8 9 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual Indicator Connection Status of the Ethernet Interface On green The Ethernet interface is electrically connected Off The Ethernet interface is not electrically connected Dis COPO ser Name 1 0 Message Link 0 Indicator IM 04L05A01 17E 2 9 e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 5 Setting the FTP Client Explanation The display data files event data files and other files on the DXP can be transferred automatically to an FTP server when the file is created Note that the Ethernet interface must be configured beforehand see section 2 3 Selecting the files to transfer You can select whether or not to automatically transfer the display event data file the report data file and the screen image data file The default setting is Off If the DXP is configured to automatically transfer individual display event data files the setup file when settings are changed and the setting change log file are also automatically transferred Setting the FTP connection Confirm the settings such as the primary and secondary FTP servers port number login name password account PASV mode and initial path with your system or network administrator e Setting the primary and secondary servers Specify the primary and secondary file transfer destinations FTP servers as described in the prev
196. n Function Maximum Number of Connections Port Number Setting measurement server 3 34260 tcp Maintenance test server 1 34261 tcp FTP server 2 21 tcp Web server 1 80 tcp Instrument information 34264 udp server SNTP server 123 udp 1 You cannot changed the port number 2 Only a single person can connect to the setting function at any given time Up to two persons can connect to the monitor function at any given time Client Functions e e e FTP client E mail transmission e mail client SNTP client IM 04L05A01 17E 2 1 eu u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 2 Connecting the Ethernet Interface When Connecting Only the DXP and A PC Connect the DXP and the PC via a HUB as in the following figure Ethernet 10BASE T straight cable interface connector Multiple devices can be connected by using a hub TEE EEE S Ethernet interface connector Ethernet cable 10BASE T straight cable When Connecting to A Preexisting Network The following figure illustrates an example in which the DXP and a PC are connected to the network When connecting the DXP or the PC to a preexisting network the transfer rate connector type etc must be matched For details consult your system or network administrator Network 10BASE T straight cable A Adapters that support Ethernet the 10BASE T hubs
197. n image data files The DXP aborts screen image data files once the file transfer to both primary and secondary servers fails Using the Transferred Files The following table indicates the format and the display method of the files transferred File Data Location Extension Format Viewing Method Display data file Internal memory DBD Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Event data file Internal memory DED Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Report file Internal memory DHR ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software A report data set DDR DWR DMR Screen image data file External PNG PNG format Viewed using commercially sold software Setup file External PPL Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Setting change log file External DPL ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software For a description of the output format see appendix 2 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual For a description of the output format see section 6 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 31 eu u JOUJAYTy ey Buisp D 2 10 Setting the Web Server Function Explanation To use the web server function set the following parameters in addition to those described in section 2 3 Enabling Disabling the Web server function Select Use or Not don t use Page type type of screen to be displayed Select Monitor or Operator For screen examples see section 2 11 Monitor page e Selecting whether or not to use the monitor page Select
198. n operation the DXP returns an FTP error code as a response If an error occurs see the DXP error log and error message see appendix 4 and carry out the corrective action DXP Operation Log Operations are recorded in the DXP operation log 2 26 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 8 Using the FTP Server Procedure Carry out the steps according to the PC software and network environment that you are using Here the requirements of the login operation are described Specifying the Connection Destination Specify the destination DXP using a host name or IP address The port number 21 is used to specify the FTP server The password is specified as follows e When the DXP is configured to use the user ID Use the combination of the user ID and password that is registered in the DXP as the password for logging into the FTP server Example If the user ID is 5555 and the password is AAAAAAAA the password used to log into the FTP server is 5555AAAAAAAA e When the DXP is configured not to use the user ID Use the password registered in the DXP Displaying the Directory of the External Storage Medium Retrieving Files Follow the operating procedures for the software program that you are using Note If the login function is not used no administrators are registered you can transfer files to the external storage medium of the DXP by logging in using the user name admin Using the Retrieved Files The following table i
199. n option M1 SX Sets the group Syntax SX pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Group number 1 to 6 p2 Group name Up to 16 characters p3 Channel construction Query SX pl Example Set channels 01 03 04 to 06 to group number 1 and group name is GROUP2 Set the channel configuration by using periods to separate each channel or by using a hyphen to specify a range of channels SX 1 GROUP2 01 03 04 06 Description An error occurs if a number of a channel that is not installed in the instrument is specified An error occurs if a number of a computation channel that is not provided on the instrument is specified SL Syntax Query Example Description The total display width of the screen in the SG Syntax Query Example e For the characters that can be used for the group name see appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes Note that semicolons and commas cannot be used Sets the trip line SL pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Group number 1 to 4 p2 Number of trip line 1 to 4 p3 Turn ON OFF the trip line display p4 Display position 0 to 100 p5 Display color RED GREEN BLUE B VIOLET BROWN ORANGE Y GREEN LIGHTBLUE VIOLET GRAY LIME CYAN DARKBLUE YELLOW LIGHTGRAY PURPLE SL pl p2 Display trip line 1 in red for group 1 SL 1 1 ON RED direction of the amplitude is taken to be 100 Sets the message spuewwog SG pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Message g
200. n place of monitor Error Messages See Using the Setting Measurement Server in section 2 7 The operating procedures on Windows Telnet are shown below When using Windows 98 1 Start the Telnet application that comes with Windows 98 2 Select Terminal Preferences from the menu bar The Terminal Preferences dialog box opens git Telnet None Sy x Stop Logging 3 Set the parameters as shown below and click OK Terminal Options Local Echo ON Others OFF Emulation VT 100 ANSI 2 54 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 14 Using the Maintenance Test Server Terminal Preferences Terminal Options Emulation Local Echo C VT 52 T Blinki VT 100 ANSI Cancel OK Help dail F YT100 Arrows Fonts E Buffer Size 25 Background Color 4 Select Connect Remote System from the men bar The Connect dialog box opens a Telnet None oy x wg Edit Terminal Help Alt F 4 5 Set the parameters as shown below and click Connect Host Name DXP s IP address or the host name Port 34261 Term Type vt100 Host Name Port telnet is TermType vt100 X The DXP returns the following message E1 402 Select function from setting or monitor For the operating procedures see Logging In in section 2 7 page 2 19 When using Windows 2000 1 Start the Telnet application that comes with Windows 2000 2 Enter display The operati
201. nd data sum sections in the Conceptual diagram on the previous page If the check sum is disabled parameter 0 a zero is inserted in the header sum and data sum sections For a sample program that calculates the sum value see Calculating the sum value on the next page When the amount of data output in response to a ME command is large all of the data may not be able to be returned in one output request parameter GET In this case the END flag becomes 0 You must send output requests parameter NEXT to receive the rest of the data until the END flag becomes 1 The bits that have for the name and flag are not used The value is undefined Identifier ID number BINARY data type Type Format Output command 0 Reserved 1 Measured computed data data Section 6 3 FD 1 FIFO data Section 6 3 FF 2 3 Reserved 4 Manual sampled data file File DMN Appendix 2 ME 5 Hourly report file File DHR Appendix 2 ME 6 Daily report file File DDR Appendix 2 ME 7 Weekly report file File DWR Appendix 2 ME 8 Monthly report file File DMR Appendix 2 ME 9 TLOG data file File DTG Undisclosed ME 10 to 12 Reserved 13 Screen image data File PNG PNG format FC 14 Reserved 15 to 19 Not used 20 Setup data File PPL Undisclosed FE 21 Display data file File DBD Undisclosed ME 22 Event data file File DBE Undisclosed ME 23 Setting ch
202. ndicates the format and the display method of the files output by the FTP server function File Data Location Extension Format Viewing Method Display data file External DBD Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Event data file External DED Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Report file External DHR ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software A report data set DDR DWR DMR Manual sampled data file External DMN ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software TLOG data file External DTG Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Setup file External PPL Undisclosed Viewed using DAQSIGNIN Setting change log file External DPL ASCII Viewed using commercially sold software Screen image data file External PNG PNG format Viewed using commercially sold software For a description of the output format see appendix 2 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual For a description of the output format see section 6 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 27 eu u JOUJEYTy ey Buisn D 2 8 Using the FTP Server Disconnecting the Connection Logging Out Follow the operating procedures for the software program that you are using to drop the connection You are automatically logged out in the following cases e When forcibly disconnected from the maintenance test server The maintenance test server can drop the connection of other devices using the close command see section 4 5 e When a communication error occurs When a tra
203. network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure Note The FTP client function on the DX100P DX200P has a timer function that drops the connection if there is no data transfer for two minutes If the server does not respond within this time period the transfer fails The FTP client function on the DX100P DX200P may overwrite the file of the same name in the destinaton directory without warning unless the server returns a denial response App 16 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Errors Related to SNTP Client 290 SNTP access failure Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 290 Character String and Details DORMANT Internal processing error LINK The link is dropped Check the cable connection 291 SNTP server does not respond Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 291 Character String and Details TIMEOUT Confirm the SNTP server is in service 292 Incorrect SNTP server setting Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 292 Character String and Details HOSTNAME Failed to specify the IP address from a hostname using the DNS Check the DNS settings and the name of the SNTP server TCPIP Internal processing error 293 Invalid SNTP server reply Fur
204. not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period IAC Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period ECHO Failed to transmit data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period REPLY Failed to receive data on the control connection Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time period SERVER The server is not in a condition to provide the service Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided App 14 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Code Message 283 FTP command was not accepted Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283 Character String and Details USER Failed user name verification Check the user name setting PASS Failed password verification Check the password setting ACCT Failed account verification Check the account setting TYPE Failed to change the transfer type Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode CWD Failed to change the directory Check the initial path setting PORT Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the security function is disabled PASV Failed to set the transfer connection Check that the server supports P
205. nsmission error reception error or timeout of the keep alive function see Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 occurs you are logged out e Log out according to the communication timeout setting See Setting Measurement Server in section 1 1 Note The auto logout setting of the DXP is unrelated to the FTP server 2 28 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 9 Using the FTP Client Required Settings Follow the procedures below to use the FTP client function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 5 Setting the FTP Client Performing the FTP Test You can check whether or not files can be transferred via the Ethernet interface by transferring a test file from the DXP to the FTP server that was configured in section 2 5 Items to check before performing this test Correctly connect the Ethernet cable For the connection procedures see section 2 2 e Check that the Ethernet interface configuration is correct For the procedures see section 2 3 and 2 5 When configuring Ethernet related settings check them with the administrator of the system or network on which the DXP is to be used Checking the FTP test results e The test file is transferred to the initial path on the destination FTP server that was specified in section 2 5 After the FTP test completes check whether or not the test file was received on the FTP server e The result of the FTP test can be confirmed by displaying the FTP log dis
206. nsmitted data is not received 100 0 0 0 0 0 the packet is automatically mb0 74 0 64 0 0 retransmitted at a predetermined time EN interval If the packet is not received after 14 retransmissions help Outputs help timeout occurs and the connection is dropped Syntax help pl lt terminator gt TCP keepdrops pl Command name Oo eliose cone Cine help net adit Total number of dropped connections S x Bei due to TCP keepalive timeout 3 xample elp D TCP sndtotal e EA a j ti ate a Total number of transmitted packets a con echo connection intormation x Y TCP sndbyte eth echo Ethernet information hai Boned Total number of transmitted bytes elp echo help TCP sndrexmitpack net echo network status tt A Shi E Total number of retransmitted qui close is connection EN packets TCP sndrexmitbyte net Outputs network statistical Total number of retransmitted bytes information TCP revtotal Total number of received packets Syntax net lt terminator gt TCP revbyte Example net F ramp Total number of received bytes EA 00 00 00 12 34 56 DLC 16 collisions Number of collision incidents A collision occurs when two or more Network Status i y 3 k devices on the network attempt to transmit simultaneously The APP power on time 00 00 00 12 34 56 tendency for cotlisiong to occur APP applalive Sos increases when the network is APR Genedrops 0 congested 16 collisions would mean A
207. nternal memory 2 Computing Set to 1 only when computation is executed 3 Alarm generating Set to 1 while the alarm is occurring 4 Accessing medium Set to 1 while the display event manual sampled report TLOG or screen image data file are being saved to the external storage medium 5 Activating e mail Set to 1 while the e mail function is engaged 6 User lock ACK not executed Set to 1 only when the user lock ACK operation has not been carried out user lock icon is displayed 7 7 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 7 2 Status Information and Filter The IF command can be used to set the filter The following figure depicts the status information and filter on this instrument 4 bytes 4 3 2 1 Status information Filter 4 3 2 1 Condition register When a status indicated on the previous page is entered the corresponding bit in the condition register is set to 1 The logical AND of the condition register and the filter becomes the status information When multiple connections are up filters can be specified for the individual connection Therefore the status information can be held for each connection IM 04L05A01 17E yoday Sn s x Appendix Appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes Lower 4 bits Upper 4 bits 0 1 2 4 5 6 7 F 0 SP P p 1 AIQ aj q 2 BIR bjr 3 C S icis
208. number 3 Recipient 1 E Recipient 2 I 13 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box 14 Inthe box enter the address of the recipient 1 15 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Recipient 1 box e Recipient 2 16 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Recipient 2 box 17 Set the address of the recipient 2 using the same method as setting the address of the recipient 1 e Sender 18 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Sender box Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Sender E 19 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Inout 20 In the box enter the address of the sender 21 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered string value is set in the Sender box Confirming Canceling the new settings 22 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 46 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function Alarm E Mail Scheduled E Mail System E Mail Report E Mail 23 Press the ESC key to display the Web e mail setting menu Press the soft key to display the setting menu to be set Alarm E Mail Go to step 24 Scheduled E Mail Go to step 41 System E Mail Go to step 53 Report E Mail Go to step 58 e Alarm E Mail e Recipient 1 Recipient 2
209. o 65535 p2 IP address on the PC side 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 p3 Port on the PC side 0 to 65535 Example close 34159 192 168 111 24 1054 EO Description This command cannot be used to disconnect a server port Also it cannot disconnect the DXP being operated Use the quit command for this purpose con Outputs connection information Syntax con lt terminator gt Example con EA 00 00 00 12 34 56 Active connections Proto Local Address Foreign Address State TCP 192 168 111 24 34159 192 168 111 24 1053 ESTABLISHED TCP 0 0 0 0 34155 0 0 0 0 0 LISTEN TCP 0 0 0 0 34159 0 0 0 O0 0 LISTEN TCP 0 0 0 0 34150 0 QO 0 O0 0 LISTEN EN TCP Protocol used Local Address The DXP s socket address Displays IP address port number Foreign Address The destination socket address Displays IP address port number State Connection status ESTABLISHED Connection established 5 38 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 9 Maintenance Test Commands eth Outputs Ethernet statistical TCP keepalive information Keepalive check cycle Syntax eth lt terminator gt TCP connects Example Total number of established connections eth TCP closed EA Total number of dropped connections 00 00 00 12 34 56 TCP timeoutdrop Total number of dropped connections Ethernet Statistics due to TCP retransmission timeout When the transmitted packet the unit Name In Pkt In Err Out Pkt Out Err 16 Coll of tra
210. o move the cursor to the FTP connection box FTP connection Press the Secondary soft key CO a Set the secondary FTP server using the same method from steps 10 through 35 Confirming Canceling the new settings 39 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi IM 04L05A01 17E 2 15 e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 6 Setting Timeout Keep Alive and the User That Is to Use the Communication Input Data Explanation Communication timeout When using the DXP as a setting measurement server or a FTP server the DXP disconnects connections if there are no data transfer over a predetermined time period Enabling Disabling the timer ON OFF On Communication timeout is enabled Off Communication timeout is disabled e Setting the timeout time When the communication timeout is enabled and if no data transfer is detected over the time period specified here the connection is dropped Range 1 to 120 minutes Enabling Disabling keepalive On Off e On If there is no response to the test packet that is periodically transmitted every 30 s at the TCP level the connection is dropped Off Keepalive is disabled Selecting Users That Are to Use the
211. oatsnesecsccsesceeseeziaeenscwes a monitor page Contents cee cece eeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeees multiple negative responses ou eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees N name of part we IV negative response NUMDET Of DYICS vscccisesvssces cocdeccettesendeveceascaesecavscesnvtenvevessees O OFF OF Pisativvanciieniai Ati nmiandainnaiateinniimin operator page OUTDUTCOMMANG raii ispeci u shinee es 5 6 5 35 output flow of FIFO data seeen App 2 output flow of the file App 4 output flow of the file list App 5 output format alarm summary 16 17 output format communication log e eects eee 6 8 output format decimal position unit information 6 6 output format e mail log 0 eee eee eene teens 6 16 output format FIFO BINARY data 6 25 output format file list oe 6 21 output format FTP log oo eee cece eee eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeee 6 10 output format measured computed BINARY data 6 25 output format measured computed data output format message summary ceeeeeeteeeteeteeeeeteees output format Operation log ccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteneees output format output of a selected operation log 6 14 output format relay status cece eeeeeeeeeeeee output format setting change log we output format SNTP log essees output format status information output format web operation log
212. ocol used to access the server HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol e Host name domain name Host name and domain name of the DXP You can also use the IP address in place of the host name and domain name e File name File name of the monitor page and operator page of the DXP File name of the monitor page monitor htm File name of the operator page operator htm If the file name is left out the monitor page is specified If the monitor page is not used however the operator page is specified Example To display the operator page using Internet Explorer on a PC in the same domain as the DXP the domain name host name and IP address are taken to be good co jp DXP and 123 456 789 123 respectively Address http DXP good co jp operator htm or Address http 123 456 789 123 operator htm Display When the DXP is in the engineering mode or system mode the monitor page cannot be displayed An error message is displayed For details on the engineering mode and system mode see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IM04L06A01 01E 2 36 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 11 Using the Web Server Contents on the monitor page Refreshes the screen automatically Selects the screen size Menu e Refreshes the screen BR DISP SE Ihour 2 16 e Displays the alarm summary EVENT e Displays the measured computed data e Displays logs e Screen displayed by the DXP When the DXP is in the operation mode the s
213. on parameters are shown 3 Set the parameters as shown below using the set command see the figure below Turn ON the Local Echo set LOCAL ECHO Send both CR and LF set CRLF 4 Connect to the DXP using open command open IP address or the host name of the DXP 34261 Put a space between IP address or the host name of the DXP and 34261 34261 is the port number of the maintenance test server ci Shortcut to telnet Displays operating parameters rosoft Telnet gt Escape Character is WILL AUTH lt NTLM Authentication LOCAL_ECHO off Sending both CR amp LF WILL TERM TYPE Preferred Term Type is ANSI Turns ON Local Echo Nie ft Telnet gt set LOCAL_ECHO Sends both CR and LF 4 Telnet gt set CRLF c he DXP A Telnet gt open dxpxx 34261 onnects to the The DXP returns the following message E1 402 Select function from setting or monitor For the operating procedures see Logging In in section 2 7 page 2 19 Also see the display example on next page IM 04L05A01 17E 2 55 e u 4 u19443 ey uIsSN D 2 14 Using the Maintenance Test Server Display example o Shortcut to telnet E Select function from setting or monitor Input username Input user ID Ei 461 Input password Password MULGI EA The DXP returns E0 EA Command example MATATA hes PELs con command
214. onfirming the setting or when closing the entry box Character number input key to enter characters or numbers for as the IP name Press the MENU key to enter the engineering mode Press the FUNC key to display the FUNC key menu such as FTP test e mail transmission test and log display ESC key Press this key to return to the previous screen or cancel the new settings Press these keys to select the menu displayed on the screen IM 04L05A01 17E Names and Uses of Parts Rear Panel DX100P Ethernet interface connector A connector used for Ethernet communications Comes standard with the instrument RS 232 interface connector A serial communication connector provided on models with the optional code C2 P eee ld I JOLO O O RS 422A 485 interface terminal Serial communication terminals provided on models with the optional code C3 DX200P Ethernet interface connector A connector used for Ethernet communications Comes standard with the instrument RS 232 interface connector A serial communication connector provided on models with the optional code C2 m m RS 422A 485 interface terminal Serial communication terminals l provi
215. ons 4 11 4 12 5 7 and 5 21 217 Unknown file type Access to other files 218 Directory exists Delete the directory or change directory name See section 5 7 219 Invalid file or directory operation Cannot handle files and directories in the 2nd and deeper layers 220 The file is already in use Try again later Wait till file is free 230 There is no setting file Access to other files 231 Abnormal setting exists in file Access to other files 1 See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO04L06A01 01E e Errors Related to Historical Trend Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 232 There is no available data This message may appear when recalling historical trend Access to other files 233 The specified historical data do not exist This message may appear when recalling historical trend 234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group This message may appear when switching to trend or bar graph from overview See section 5 9 1 See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO4L06A01 01E e Errors Related to Sign Record Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 240 You cannot sign this record because a signature is already present Sign at the same authority level is allowed once 243 This file is not allowed to sign record Only files saved at Memory Stop can be signed 244 Data is damaged or changed Y
216. ord is used 1 Memory Stop refers to the action of stopping the data acquisition to the internal memory 2 Batch stop sign record is used to finish the batch by applying electronic signature to the acquired data when Memory Stop is executed Display data event data which acquisition is finished When you load and apply electronic signature to the data file in the external storage medium using the FUNC key operation Note When a file with the same name exists at the destination e Display data event data which acquisition is in progress If a file with the same name exists at the destination the name of the transferred file is changed at the last character 8th character Example An hourly report file X0212000 DBD is changed to X021200A DBD and transferred Characters A to Z are used in order for the last character of the file name e Display data event data which acquisition is finished If a file with the same name exists at the destination it is overwritten by the transferred file The file in the external storage medium and the file at the destination can always be kept identical by overwriting e Setup File and Setting Change Log File Transferred to an FTP server when settings are changed and applied saved to an external storage medium Note If a file with the same name exists at the transfer destination it is overwritten 2 30 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 9 Using the FTP Client e Report file When a r
217. ou cannot sign this file 245 This function cannot be used in the record signature display End the sign record screen See sections 6 3 246 This function cannot be used due to no data file saved in media Check the external storage medium 247 This function cannot be used in the engineering mode display End the engineering mode See section 3 5 248 Signature function cannot be performed Check the external storage medium 1 See the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IM04L06A01 01E App 12 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages e Errors Related to E mail and Web server Code Message Explanation Countermeasures Ref section 260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available The IP address is not specified Check the IP address 261 SMTP server is not found Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name e Check the DNS setting e Check the SMTP server name 262 Cannot initiate E mail transmission e The host name of the DXP is not correct Check the host name e The port number for SMTP server is not correct Check the port number 263 Sender s address rejected by the server Check the sender s address 264 Some recipients addresses are invalid Check the recipient s address 265 SMTP protocol error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail tran
218. our the language to English use the partial expansion function and the remote controller ID to 5 XU CHANNEL 1H ENGLISH USE 5 The SP command cannot be specified unless the partial expanded display function p4 of the XU command is set to USE Parameter p5 remote controller ID is valid on models with the easy text entry option KB1 or KB2 Sets the remote action XR pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Remote number 1 to 8 p2 Remote action NONE No action ALARMACK Alarm acknowledge MEMORYSTART STOP Start stop measurement MANUALSAMPLE Manual sampling MESSAGE1 Write message 1 MESSAGE2 Write message 2 MESSAGE3 Write message 3 MESSAGE4 Write message 4 MESSAGE5 Write message 5 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 19 spuewwog 5 5 Setting Commands System Mode MESSAGE6 Write message 6 MESSAGE7 Write message 7 MESSAGE8 Write message 8 MATHSTART STOP Start stop MATH MATHRESET Reset MATH TIMEADJUST Adjust time SNAPSHOT Snapshot Query XR pl Example Set the remote action of remote terminal 1 to a manual sampling XR 1 MANUALSAMPLE XQ Sets the timer When not using the timer Syntax XQ pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Timer number 1 to 3 p2 Timer type OFF Query XQ pl Example Turn the number 1 timer OFF XQ 1 OFF Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 When using the absolute timer Syntax XQ pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Timer number 1 to
219. p shot was executed 6 No Yes Sum check 5 4 3 2 No Yes Indicates that the decimal position or unit information was changed during measurement No Yes Indicates that the acquiring interval to the FIFO buffer was changed No Yes Indicates that the internal process computation for example took too much time and that the measurement could not keep up at the specified scan interval on The flags that have for the flag column are not used The value is undefined e Measured computed data The FD and FF commands output the mantissa of the measured computed data The measured data is a 16 bit signed integer the computed data is a 32 bit signed integer By combining with the decimal position information obtained with the FE command the correct measured computed data can be derived Binary value Decimal position Measured value Binary value Decimal position Measured value Integer code Integer code 10000 0 10000 10000 3 10 000 10000 1 1000 0 10000 4 1 0000 10000 2 100 00 e Special data value The measured computed data take on the following values under special conditions Special data value Measured data Computed data over 7FFFH 7FFF7FFFH over 8001H 8001H8001H Skip 8002H 8002H8002H Error 8004H 8004H8004H Undefined 8005H 8005H8005H Note The number of blocks number of bytes and measured computed data are output according to the byte order specified with the B
220. p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt pl Turn ON OFF reflash ON OFF p2 Relay number set to AND logic NONE I01 I01 Ixx Ixx I02 to 106 I11 to 116 only for DX200P I21 to 126 only for DX200P I31 to 126 only for DX200P p3 Energize De energize the relay ENERGIZE DE_ENERGIZE p4 Hold Not hold the relay HOLD NONHOLD p5 Hold Not hold the alarm status display HOLD NONHOLD p6 Interval for the upper limit on the rate of change 1 to 15 p7 Interval for the lower limit on the rate of change 1 to 15 p8 Turn ON OFF the alarm hysteresis ON OFF Query XA Example Set relay numbers I01 to 112 to AND logic Enable reflash Set the alarm to energizing and hold Set the alarm status display to hold Set the interval for the upper limit on the rate of change to 10 and the interval for the lower limit on the rate of change to 12 Enable alarm hysteresis XA ON I01 112 ENERGIZE HOLD HOLD 10 12 0N Description The interval is set in units of the scan interval The XV command is used to set the scan interval The hysteresis setting does not apply to computation channels Xl Sets the A D integral time Syntax XI pl lt terminator gt pl A D integral time AUTO 50HZ 60HZ 100MS Query XI Example Set the A D integral time to 50 Hz XI 50HZ Description 100 MS is available only on models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and DX230P XB Sets the burn out Syntax XB pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100
221. played on the DXP see section 8 9 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual or Web screen see section 2 11 or by outputting the logs using the FL command see section 2 7 Procedure 1 Press the FUNC key to display the FUNC menu The construction of the FUNC menu varies depending on the basic settings and options 2 Press the FTP test soft key to display a menu used to select the destination on which the FTP test to be performed C 3 Press either the Primary or Secondary soft key The FTP test is performed on the specified FTP server ED IM 04L05A01 17E 2 29 e u 4 u19443 ey uIsSN D 2 9 Using the FTP Client Transferring Files Starting When you complete the FTP client settings the DXP is ready to transfer files File transfer The data files are automatically transferred to the FTP destination FTP server at the following points e Display data file event data file Display data event data which acquisition is in progress e At intervals specified by the auto save interval for the display data or the data length for the event data e At every specified date and time using the Memory Timeup function e When you save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using the FUNC key operation e When Memory Stop is executed when Batch stop sign record is not used e When Memory Stop is executed and electronic signature is applied to the data file when Batch stop sign rec
222. port Weekly report Monthly report e When Report Is Created Only on Models with the Optional Computation Function M1 Transmits the report Testing E mail Transmission You can send a test message from the DXP to the destination to check e mail transmissions You can confirm the result of the e mail transmission test on the e mail log screen see paragraph Other functions described later 1 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface SNTP Server SNTP Client The DXP operates as an SNTP server The DXP returns time information in response to a time query from a client machine on the network The time resolution is 15 625 ms For a description of how to set up and use this function see sections 2 16 and 2 17 The time on the DXP can be synchronized to the time of an SNTP server on the network For a description of how to set up and use this function see sections 2 16 and 2 17 SNTP client SNTP server Returns the time Time query Etherne Periodic Time Adjustment Queries the time on a server at specified time intervals and synchronizes the time Setting the Time When Starting Measurements Queries the time on a server when measurement is started and synchronizes the time Setting the Time Using Keys Queries the time on a server at an arbitrary time and synchronizes the time Only an administrator can carry out this op
223. pshot of the screen SU SNAPSHOT SK Sets the computation constant Syntax SK pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Computation constant number DX100P K01 to K12 DX200P K01 to K30 p2 Constant Up to 11 characters The range is 9 9999E 29 to 1 0000E 30 0 and 1 0000E 30 to 9 9999E 29 The sign of E can be omitted The maximum number of significant digits is 5 Query SK pl Example Set constant 1 0000E 10 for computation constant number K01 SK K01 1 0000E 10 Description This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 Sl Sets the rolling average of the computation channel When the rolling average of a computation channel is OFF Syntax SI pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Computation channel number DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 p2 Rolling average ON OFF OFF Query SI pl Example Turn OFF the rolling average of computation channel number 31 SI 31 0FF When the rolling average of a computation channel is ON Syntax SI pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Computation channel number DX100P 31 to 42 DX200P 31 to 60 p2 Rolling average ON OFF ON p3 Sampling interval 1S 2S 3S 4S 5S 6S 10S 12S 15S 20S 30S 1MIN 2MIN 3MIN 4MIN 5MIN 6MIN 10MIN 12MIN 15MIN 20MIN 30MIN 1H p4 Number of samples 1 to 64 Query SI pl Example Turn the rolling average of computation channel 31 ON set the sampling interval to 1 minute and the number of samples to 2
224. ption This command can be used on models with the computation function option M1 e About p4 Because the sampled data are integrated over each scan interval the physical value integrated over a given period of time may be different from the actual integrated value This occurs if the given period is not equal to the scan interval In these cases set p4 to the unit of the integration time desired The integrated value is found according to the following conversion equations that depend on the p4 parameter OFF Measured value S Measured value x scan interval MIN Measured value x scan interval 60 HOUR Measured value x scan interval 3600 DAY Measured value x scan interval 86400 The unit of the scan interval is seconds XO Selects the communication interface used to output files on the external storage medium using ME command spuewwog Syntax XO pl lt terminator gt pl Communication type ETHERNET Ethernet communications SERIAL Serial communications Query XO Example Set the communication interface to Ethernet the communication interface is used to output files on the external storage medium using the ME command XO ETHERNET Description The p1 parameter can be set on models with the serial interface C2 or C3 option XG Sets the time zone Syntax XG pl lt terminator gt pl The offset time from GMT 1200 to 1200 Upper two digits Hours 00 to 12 Lower two digits Minutes 00 to
225. r LO 5 34 the user name and user ID when logging in KE Executes key operations Oo E S LO 5 34 Ifthe DXP is configured to allow settings to be changed while data acquisition is in progress an administrator can use the EE and BE commands even when data acquisition is in progress See page 2 23 If the DXP is configured to allow the time to be adjusted while data acquisition is in progress an administrator can use the SD command even when data acquisition is in progress see page 2 23 Output Commands Command Function Execution Mode Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function Control BO Sets the output byte order O E S Yes Yes 5 35 cs Sets the checksum This command can be used oO E S Yes Yes 5 35 only during serial communications IF Sets the status filter Oo E S Yes Yes 5 35 Setup measured and computed data output FC Outputs screen image data O E S Yes Yes 5 35 FE Outputs decimal position unit information 0 FE S Yes Yes 5 35 and setup data FD Outputs the most recent measured computed data 0 E Yes Yes 5 35 FF Outputs FIFO data O E Yes Yes 5 36 FL Outputs logs alarm summary and message summary O E S Yes Yes 5 36 FI Outputs a selected operation log oO E S Yes Yes 5 36 Is Outputs status information Oo E S Yes Yes 5 37 FU Outputs user information Oo E S Yes Yes 5 37 RS 422A 485 dedicated commands Command Function Execution Mode Page Name Esc O Opens the instrument Oo E
226. r length Command length exceeded Over number Number of commands exceeded Serial error Received an error character through serial communications login Ready to receive commands via the Ethernet interface logout Not ready to receive commands via the Ethernet interface ddd byte data output ddd is the number of data suods y points Login login Logout logout Disconnected Forced disconnection occurs when the connection was disconnected by the maintenance test server etc Time out Disconnection caused by a timeout keepalive etc El nnn single negative response nnn is the error number E2 ee nnn multiple negative response ee is the error position nnn is the error number Space The following example shows the log when multiple commands separated by sub delimiters B01 BO1 are transmitted The commands are separated and output in order with the multiple command flags EA 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 99 05 11 EN 12 12 12 12 12 12 31 11 1 user gt BOL 31 11 1 user lt EO 2 31 11 1 user x gt 22 2 31 11 1 user lt E2 01 124 31 11 1 user gt BO1 31 11 1 user lt EO IM 04L05A01 17E 6 9 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data FTP Log Error Log The FL command is used to output the data e The FTP client log is output Up to 50 file transfer logs are retained Logs that exceed 5
227. re detector DI Digital input p3 Measurement range p4 Lower limit of span p5 Upper limit of span Query SR pl Example Set the input type for channel 01 to thermocouple type R span lower limit to 0 C and span upper limit to 1760 0 C SR 01 TC R 0 17600 Description Set parameters p3 p4 and p5 according to the table in section 5 3 For parameters p4 and p5 enter a value using 5 digits or less excluding the decimal The decimal position is fixed to the position indicated in the table in section 5 3 When computing the difference between channels Syntax SR pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 p2 Range mode DELTA p3 Input type VOLT DC VOLTAGE TC Thermocouple RTD Resistance temperature detector DI Digital input p4 Measurement range p5 Lower limit of span p6 Upper limit of span p7 Reference channel DX100P 01 to 12 DX200P 01 to 30 Query SR pl Example Set the range mode of channel 10 to the difference computation between channels with the reference channel set to 01 and set the input type to TC Set the range to R Set the span lower limit to 10 0 C and span upper limit to 100 0 C SR 10 DELTA TC R 100 1000 01 Description Set parameters p4 p5 and p6 according to the table in section 5 3 For parameters p5 and p6 enter a value using 5 digits or less excluding the decimal The decimal position is fixed to the position ind
228. re given below The data in the register do not contain unit and decimal position information The unit and decimal position information must be set to the Modbus master host beforehand A binary value is put into the registers with the upper byte first Input register Data 30001 Measured data of CH01 30030 Measured data of CH30 The corresponding registers 30001 to 30002 on the DX102P 30001 to 30004 on the DX104P 30001 to 30006 on the DX106P 30001 to 30012 on the DX112P 30001 to 30004 on the DX204P 30001 to 30008 on the DX208P 30001 to 30010 on the DX210P 30001 to 30020 on the DX220P 30001 to 30030 on the DX230P e Measured data is a 16 bit signed integer For the values refer to the measured data in binary format page 6 21 31001 Alarm status of the measured data of CH01 31030 Alarm status of the measured data of CH30 The corresponding registers 31001 to 31002 on the DX102P 31001 to 31004 on the DX104P 31001 to 31006 on the DX106P 31001 to 31012 on the DX112P 31001 to 31004 on the DX204P 31001 to 31008 on the DX208P 31001 to 31010 on the DX210P 31001 to 31020 on the DX220P 31001 to 31030 on the DX230P Alarm status is a 16 bit unsigned integer For the values refer to the alarm status in binary format page 6 21 The register holds the data in the order as A2A1A4A3 32001 Computed data of CH31 upper byte 32002 Computed data of CH31 lower byte 32003 Computed data of CH32 upper byte
229. received buffer becomes full all overflow data are discarded The RS signal is fixed to True IM 04L05A01 17E 3 3 suondo 9 ZD 89e 19 U jenas y Huisn B 3 2 RS 232 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement and Signal Names the Connection Procedure and Handshaking XON XON Data transmission control Software handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When an X OFF code is received while sending data to the PC the DXP stops the data transmission When it receives the next X ON code it resumes the data transmission The CS signal received from the PC is ignored Data reception control Software handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When the amount of used space in the received buffer reaches 1537 bytes the X OFF code is transmitted When the amount of used space in the received buffer falls to 511 bytes X ON code is transmitted The RS signal is fixed to True XON RS Data transmission control Software handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When an X OFF code is received while sending data to the PC the DXP stops the data transmission When it receives the next X ON code it resumes the data transmission CS signal from the PC is ignored Data reception control Hardware handshaking is performed between the DXP and the PC When the amount of used space in the received buffer reaches 1537 bytes the RS signal is set to False When the amount of used space in the
230. rn to the previous values Note When using the Modbus protocol Data length and Handshaking settings are invalid The Memory output setting is not related to Modbus 4 4 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 4 Setting the Configuration that is Used When the Modbus Protocol is Used Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 8 Communication DX100P or 6 Communication DX200P soft key to display the communication function setting menu 3 Press the 6 Serial Memory out DX100P or 1 Ethernet Serial DX200P soft key to display the communication Serial menu DX100P Communication Serial Memory out menu DX200P Communication Ethernet Serial menu Serial Ethernet f Serial Baud rate s00 GE IP address B 8 Baud rate 96008 bps Data length 8 bit Subnet mask a 8 8 8 Data length 8 bit Parity Even Default gateway a 8 8 8 Parity Even RS 232 DNS On Off ort RS 232 Server search order Handshaking Off OFf Handshaking Off OFF Primary b 6 8 8 RS 422A7485 RS 422A 485 Secondary eo 8 Address 1 Host_name Protocol Normal Address 1 Protocol Normal Domain name Henory out Ethernet Homonoia Ethernet Domain suffix search order 1266 2400 4300 9688 Next 1 2 Primary Secondary Selecting the baud rate 4 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Baud rate
231. rned The response is generated for each erroneous command If there are multiple commands that have errors the negative responses are separated by commas The error position number is assigned to the series of commands in order starting with 1 assigned to the first command Syntax E2_ee nnnCRLF When there is only one error E2_ee nnn ee nnn ee nnnCRLF When there are multiple errors ee Error position 01 to 10 nnn Error number 001 to 999 E Space Example E2 02 001 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 1 suods y ol 6 1 Response Syntax ASCII Output The following types of ASCII data are available For the data formats see section 6 2 ASCII data Output command Decimal position unit information FE Measured computed data FD Communication log FTP log Error log Operation log FL Web operation log E mail log Alarm summary Message summary Setting change log SNTP log Outputs a selected operation log FI Status information IS Relay status FD User information FU Setting information output by a query command See sections 5 4 and 5 5 Syntax EACRLF eo eee eee eee eee CRLF eo eee eee eee eee CRLF eee eee eee eee eee CRLF ENCRLF BINARY Output The following types of BINARY data are available BINARY Data Output Command Measured computed data FD FIFO data measured computed data FF Screen image data FC Setup data FE Files on the
232. ronic signature function BS pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Use not use the electronic signature function USE NOT p2 Whether or not to sign the data at Memory Stop ON OFF p3 Use not use the user ID to apply electronic signature USE NOT Query Example BS Use electronic signature function user ID to apply electronic signature Switch the screen to the sign record display at Memory Stop BS USE ON USE Description Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 USE EK Sets administrators When using the user ID Syntax Query Example EK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 lt terminator gt pl Registration No 1 to 3 p2 Login method OFF Disabled KEY Key operation KEY COM Key operation and via Ethernet p3 User name up to 20 characters p4 User ID up to 8 characters p5 Password arbitrary characters p6 Password expiration time OFF 1Month 3Month 6Month EK pl Only an administrator can use the query Set login method user name user ID and password expiration time to KEY COM ABC 5555 and 3 months respectively for administrator 1 EK 1 KEY COM ABC 5555 3Month When not using the user ID Syntax Query Example EK pl p2 p3 p4 p5 lt terminator gt pl Registration No 1 to 3 p2 Login method OFF Disabled KEY Key operation KEY COM Key operation and via Ethernet p3 User name up to 20 characters p4 Password arbitrary characters p5 Password expiration time OFF
233. roup number 1 to 7 p2 Message number 1 to 8 p3 Message Up to 32 characters SG pl p2 Set character string MESSAGE1 to message number 1 of the message group 2 SG 2 1 MESSAGE1 Description For the characters that can be used for the SH Syntax Query Example message see appendix 1 ASCII Character Codes Note that semicolons and commas cannot be used Sets the file header SH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Header for the files saved to the external storage medium Up to 32 characters p2 Directory Up to 8 characters SH Add a header DATA1 and save the file to the DATAFILE directory SH DATA1 DATAFILE Description Data to be saved to the external storage medium includes the display event TLOG manual sampled report data and screen image data IM 04L05A01 17E 5 4 Setting Commands Engineering Mode SE Syntax Query Example SB Syntax Query Example Sets the display direction background color trend line width trip line width number of grids scroll time and scale digit SE pl p2 p3 p4 p5 p6 p7 p8 lt terminator gt pl Display direction of the trend waveform HORIZONTAL VERTICAL HORIZON2 p2 Display direction of the bar graph waveform HORIZONTAL VERTICAL p3 Background color WHITE BLACK p4 The line width of the trend 1 to 3 dot p5 The width of the trip line 1 to 3 dot p6 Number of grids 4 to 12 AUTO p7 The time interv
234. rror Set to 1 when an error occurs during command execution a 4 SNTP error when starting Set to 1 when the time could not be adjusted using SNTP data acquisition when data acquisition is started 5to7 Status Information 3 Bit Name Description 0 1 2 Memory end 3 Logged in 4 Login not allowed 5to7 Set to 1 while the following condition is true e When the free space on the storage medium is less than or equal to 10 or 6 MB if the storage area of the external storage medium is not used cyclically Media FIFO When an error is detected in the storage medium if the storage area of the external storage medium is used cyclically Media FIFO e When the remaining amount of time of the internal memory time until overwriting starts is less than or equal to the specified time memory alarm time if an external storage medium is not inserted in the drive Set to 1 when logged in using keys logged into the setting function via the Ethernet interface or logged in via the serial interface Set to 1 while login using keys login to the setting function via the Ethernet interface or login via the serial interface are not allowed IM 04L05A01 17E 7 1 The Bit Structure of the Status Information Status Information 4 Bit Name Description 0 System mode Set to 1 during system mode 1 Memory sampling Set to 1 while data are being acquired into the i
235. rument information server line feed code list of commands lOQ ssveisstsavseesesees ole 010 E ATE rer rrero tr rcertrreererer tre Treerre rr eer logging in FTP server oo eee eee eects ecreeeeeeeeeeeeeenaes logging in maintenance test server hs logging in setting measurement server eee 2 19 logging in after the first time ee eee eeseeeeeeeaee 2 22 logging out FTP server nasses 2 28 logging out maintenance test server 2 56 logging out setting measurement server 2 25 l gin FLP SOPVGM sctsicidass cosccnceccashstdcsndiecoacecssstedcnssssncancetdedes 1 4 login setting measurement server cee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 1 3 login NaAME siirinsesi login process maintenance test command ccessteeeeeeeeeseaeeees 5 7 5 38 maintenance test Server ccccccccceccessseeeeeeeeesssseeees 1 8 2 54 aale E Ce E E E E E EE 4 1 maximum number of CONNECTIONS eeeeeeeer eee 2 1 memory out a MENU KOY vissivssiseticcsuce cobacasstsassesinecesdavaiteseniticsieds Gaacivsituaiscesn i messages during the login process n Modbus error response e eee Modbus master cceeeeee Modbus protocol specification Modbus Slave TE EEE T MODBUS STATUS screen ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaes monitor function setting measurement function monitor function setting measurement server MOMMOL PAGE sesiccsscccseces seeccves
236. ry Example RG Syntax Query Example XC Syntax Query Example RC Syntax Query Example Description WA Syntax Query Example Use the operator page User name and password for access control are ABC2001 and AAAAAAAA respectively EG OPERATOR ON ON ABC2001 AAAAAAAA Sets the time deviation limit RG pl lt terminator gt pl Time deviation limit OFF 10s 20s 30s lmin 2min 3min 4min 5min RG When the time deviation between the specified time and the time on the DXP is within 10 s gradually adjust the DXP time RG 10s Sets the cyclical use of the storage area of the external storage medium Media FIFO XC pl lt terminator gt pl Cyclical use of the storage area of the external storage medium ON OFF spuewwog XC Use the storage area of the external storage medium cyclically XC ON Enables Disables setting changes when data acquisition is in progress RC pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Time adjustment ON OFF p2 User registration setting ON OFF p3 Calibration correction ON OFF p4 Auto message writing during calibration correction setting change ON OFF RC Enable all RC ON ON ON ON Parameters p3 and p4 are valid when the calibration correction CC1 option is installed The setting of p4 is valid when p3 is ON Sets the SNTP server WA pl lt terminator gt pl Use not use the SNTP server function U
237. s occur at the end of the command those delimiters can be omitted Example SR 01 VOLT lt terminator gt SR 01 VOLT lt terminator gt The number of digits of the following parameters is fixed If the number of digits is not correct when entering the command a syntax error results e Date YY MM DD 8 characters YY Year Enter the lower two digits of the year MM Month DD Day e Time HH MM SS 8 characters HH Hour MM Minute SS Second e Channel number 2 characters e Relay number 3 characters example 102 IM 04L05A01 17E spuewwog po 5 1 Command Syntax Response Query e A question mark is used to specify a query e By placing a query after a command or parameter the setting information of the corresponding command can be queried Some commands cannot execute queries For the query syntax of each command see sections 5 4 to 5 7 Example 1 SR p1 SR or SR pl canbe executed Example 2 SA pl p2 SA SA pl or SA pl p2 canbe executed Delimiter e A comma is used as a delimiter e Parameters are separated by delimiters Sub delimiter e A semicolon is used as a sub delimiter e By separating each command with a sub delimiter up to 10 commands can be specified one after another However the following commands that make the DXP output data and the commands that disconnect the connection cannot be specified one after another Use them independently e FC FE FD FF IS FU FL ME YE Bad Ead
238. s protocol IM 04L05A01 17E 3 5 suondo 9 ZD e9e 19 U jenas y Huisy B 3 3 RS 422A 485 Interface Pin Arrangement Signal Names and the Connection Procedure Connection Example with the Host Computer The instrument can be connected to a host computer that has an RS 232 RS 422A or RS 485 port For RS 232 use the converter For recommended converters see the latter section Serial Interface converter The two wire cable can be used only when using the Modbus protocol For the configuration procedure see section 4 4 Four wire system In general the instrument and the host computer are connected using a four wire cable For the four wire system the transmission and reception lines must be crossed Host computer Terminator externally attached 120 Q 1 2 W or more Terminator externally attached RS 422A 485 pins on the DXP SD_A spa N SDA SDA O Q SDA O SDA O SD B SD B SD B SDB O O SDB O SDB O Y RD A RD A RD A Y RDA O O RD A O RD A RD B W RD B RD B RDB O RD B O RD B SG SG SG SG SG AN FG FG Ho re in n lt 32 Do not connect terminator to 1 to n 1 The following diagram illustrates the case when the host computer s interface is RS 232 Host computer m Terminator externally a
239. s the arrow key to move the cursor to the Access reference time box HOUESS ITILEIval in Access reference time A 1H anace timant LT 19 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box SS 20 Inthe entry box enter the starting point of the time queries 21 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered time is set in the Access reference time box e Setting the access timeout 22 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Access timeout box AvVVSID ISIS GVS VING UU UU Access timeout 23 Press the 10s 30s or 90s soft key 18s 38s 98s eo a 24 Press the DISP ENTER key The setting is entered IM 04L05A01 17E 2 61 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 16 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Setting the time adjustment that is performed while data acquisition is in progress 25 Press the ESC key to return to the SNTP setting menu 26 Press the 2 SNTP synched to start soft key to display the SNTP synched to start menu SNTP synched to start Time adjust on Start action Off 27 Press the On or Off soft key to set the Time adjust on Start action box On Off Se a Confirming Canceling the new settings 28 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel the settings press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new
240. same as the selections for p2 The group number 1 to 6 to display in the lower right quadrant of the divided screen screen 4 the screen to four screen display display item of screen 1 to trend display the group number to display in screen 1 to 1 the display item of screen 2 to digital display the group number to display in screen 2 to 2 the display item of screen 3 to bar graph display the group number to display in screen 3 to 3 the display item of screen 4 to message summary display and the group number to display in screen 4 to 4 UD 2 TREND 1 DIGITAL 2 BAR 3 MESSAGE Description The p3 p5 p7 and p9 parameters are valid when p2 p4 p6 and p8 are set to TREND DIGITAL or BAR Switches the 4 panel display only for DX200P Syntax pl p2 UD pl p2 lt terminator gt Switching the screen 3 4 panel display number 0 to 4 0 Refresh the 4 panel display 1 Display the screen of 4 panel display number 1 2 Display the screen of 4 panel display number 2 3 Display the screen of 4 panel display number 3 IM 04L05A01 17E 5 29 5 6 Control Commands wh Re Pe nee 4 panel AK Confirms the alarm status display number 4 alarm acknowledge Example Display the screen of 4 panel display amie a Syntax AK pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt ae pl 0 Acknowledge all alarms Description Parameter p2 0 is valid when a 4 panel T acknoWtedge sararma individually display is on the s
241. see section 2 5 the SMTP server name see section 2 12 or the Server name see section 2 16 IM 04L05A01 17E eu u JOUJAYTy ey Buisn D 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface e Domain suffix If the IP address corresponding to the domain name described in the previous paragraph is not found on the DNS server then it may be that the system is configured to use another domain name In this case the domain suffix is specified so that this domain name is searched after the domain name specified in the previous paragraph is searched e Set the domain suffix using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Up to two domain suffixes can be specified primary and secondary Memory out Select the communication type Ethernet communications or serial communications used to output the data on the external storage medium of the DXP using the ME command 2 Select Ethernet 1 This item appears if the serial communication function C2 or C3 option is equipped 2 This command can be used on either the Ethernet communications or serial communications 3 When the login function is enabled when any of administrators are registered the ME command cannot be used via the serial communications Storing the settings To activate the settings made in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings return to the previous values 2 4 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 3 Configuring the Eth
242. select Yes an error message Media has not been inserted appears In this case the settings cannot be saved and the DXP cannot proceed to the system mode The error message is cleared by pressing ESC Insert an external storage medium into the drive and carry out the procedure again Changing the settings 1 Press the soft key corresponding to the objective settings This procedure is described in the procedure for each item 2 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor onto the desired parameter DNS On Off ia lt __ The parameter box containing Server search order the cursor is blue Primary b 6 B 3 For parameters whose selections are shown at the bottom of the screen press the soft key under the desired selection For parameters that need characters to be entered in the entry box press the Input soft key to display the entry box enter the characters and press the DISP ENTER key vi IM 04L05A01 17E Names and Uses of Parts 4 Parameter selections Parameter entry box Selection example for DNS On Off Example of the entry box Press either the On or Off soft key for the IP address DNS On Off Off Server search order fio o o Primary b 6 B B Secondary b B 8 8 Host_name Domain nane Domain suffix search order Primary Secondary Ge C L e The boxes containing parameters that have not been changed are displayed in white e The boxes containing parameters
243. selected See section 5 3 Incorrect function parameter See section 5 3 The input numerical value exceeds the set range Enter a proper value Incorrect input character string Enter a proper character string Too many characters Enter specified number of characters Incorrect input mode See section 5 1 oJoINI OJAJ AJOJN Incorrect input range code See section 5 1 N A Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel See section 5 1 N N The upper and lower span limits are equal See section 5 1 N The upper and lower scale limits are equal See section 5 1 wo Oo The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span See section 5 11 wo Partial expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel See section 5 1 wo a The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal See section 5 11 wo O The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper limit See section 5 11 wo NJ The display band is narrower than 4 of the entire display See section 5 11 A oO Incorrect group set character string See section 5 9 A ae There is no specified input channel Check the number of input channels A N Exceeded the number of channels which can be set Check the number of input channels A ao A channel number cannot repeat in a group
244. settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 62 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 17 Using the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Required Settings Follow the procedures below to use the SNTP server function or SNTP client function e Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface e Section 2 16 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Note If the DXP is in the system mode time transmission by the SNTP server and time query by the SNTP client are not carried out SNTP Server Function When atime query is received from a client on the network the DXP returns its time information The client does not need to log into the DXP The port number that the SNTP server function of the DXP uses is 123 SNTP Client Function Periodic Time Adjustment Queries the time on a server at specified time intervals and sets the time information e When Data Acquisition Is in Progress If the time deviation between the time of the DXP internal clock and the correct time the specified time is within a specified value the time on the DXP is adjusted gradually Otherwise the time is not corrected For details see section 1 10 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual e When Data Acquisition Is Stopped If the time deviation between the time of the DXP internal clock and the correct time the specified time is within ten minutes the time of the DXP internal clock is changed immediately Otherwise the time
245. shion as the corresponding keys on the DXP The operator page is also refreshed Select Group gt E Select Group gt OA The DISP ENTER key and arrow keys Note The two operations described above cannot be performed in the following cases If there is a user logged in using the keys on the DXP or there is a user who started the login operation When there is a user logged into the DXP setting function via communications However if the DXP is configured to allow screen switching when logged out see section 4 4 in the DX100P DX200P User s Manual for the setup procedure the operation is possible even when there is a user logged in to the DXP setting function via communications 2 40 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 11 Using the Web Server Note If the DXP is configured not to use the login function no administrators are registered free messages can be written and alarm ACK operation can be performed on individual alarms on the operator page e Writing free messages only when not using the login function When the login function is not being used the Message button appears in the display menu section Click Message to open the message operation window Select the free message number enter the message string using the keyboard and click Set amp Write The message will be written Auto Refresh OFF Z Zoom Message button Message operation window COMMAND MAIN DX Microsoft In
246. smission 266 Ethernet cable is not connected Check the cable connection 267 Could not connect to SMTP server e Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the network e If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP address check to see that the IP address is correct 268 E mail transmission request failed Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 269 E mail transfer error May occur if a network failure cable problems duplicate addresses network device failure and so on occurs in the middle of the e mail transmission 275 The current image cannot be output to the Web The setup screen cannot be output to the Web This message is displayed on the Web screen 276 Image data currently being created Unable to perform key operation Try again a little later This message is displayed on the Web screen 277 Could not output screen to Web Failed to create the image This message is displayed on the Web screen 278 Web control denied because a user has control If there is a user logged in using the keys on the DXP or if there is a user logged into the setting function of the setting measurement server of the DXP via the communication interface you cannot operate the DXP from the browser IM 04L05A01 17E App 13 xipueddy Ey Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages e Errors Related to FTP Client An error messages returned via the communication interface does not include Character Strin
247. splayed e You cannot enter password Enters the user name or the user name and user ID when logging in This command is used for barcode input only BP pl p2 p3 lt terminator gt pl Input type 1 2 1 Enter user name 2 Enter user mane and user ID p2 User name up to 20 characters p3 User ID up to 8 characters Enter ABC2001 and 5555 as a user name and user ID respectively BP 2 ABC2001 5555 Description KE Syntax Example If this command with parameter p1 1 is executed the DXP waits user ID entered e If this command with parameter p1 2 is executed the DXP waits password entered Executes key operations This command is used for barcode input only KE pl lt terminator gt pl Keys DX100P Fl to F5 Soft keys 1 to 5 ESC ESC key MENU MENU key FUNC FUNC key START START key STOP STOP key USER USER key DISP DISP ENTER key UP Up arrow key DOWN Down arrow key RIGHT Right arrow key LEFT Left arrow key DX200P Fl to F7 Soft keys 1 to 7 ESC ESC key MENU MENU key FUNC FUNC key START START key STOP STOP key USER USER key 0 TO 9 Number 0 to 9 key MINUS key DOT key DISP DISP ENTER key UP Up arrow key DOWN Down arrow key RIGHT Right arrow key LEFT Left arrow key Press the DISP ENTER key KE DISP Description Operates in the same fashion as the key operation on the DXP For consecutive key operations transmit the commands in the same order as the key operation on the DXP
248. sponse when the instrument with the specified address does not exist None ESC C_xx CRLF _ Space Close the instrument Response from the instrument with the specified address ESC C_xx CRLF e Response when the instrument with the specified address does not exist None The causes that the condition become The instrument with the specified address does not exist is such as a command error the address not matching that of the instrument the instrument is not being turned ON and the instrument not being connected via the serial interface e The xx in the table indicates the instrument s address Specify the address that is assigned to the instrument from 01 to 32 Only one instrument can be opened at any one time e When an instrument is opened with the ESC O command all commands on the instrument become active When an instrument is opened with the ESC O command any other instrument that is open is automatically closed e Normally either CR LF or LF can be used as terminators However the terminator for this command must be CR LF Note The ASCII code of ESC is 1BH See appendix 1 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 5 suods y ol 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Note The CRLF used in this section denotes carriage return line feed Decimal Position Unit Information The FE command is used to output the data The physical value can be obtained from the mantissa of the measure
249. ss the SNTP soft key Time adjustment using the SNTP client function is executed Note While waiting for a response from the SNTP server you cannot operate the DXP using keys and or the remote control function till the timeout period elapses 2 64 IM 04L05A01 17E Chapter 3 Using the Serial Interface C2 C3 Options 3 1 Serial Interface Specifications The specifications for the two types of serial interfaces RS 232 and RS 422A 485 on the DXP are given below RS 232 Interface Specifications Connector type D Sub 9 pin plug Electrical mechanical specifications Conforms to the EIA 574 standard for the 9 pin interface of the EIA 232 RS 232 standard Connection Point to point Communication Half duplex Synchronization Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps Start bit 1 bit fixed Data length Select 7 or 8 bits Select 8 bits when outputting data in binary format Parity Select odd even or none Stop bit 1 bit fixed Hardware handshaking Select whether to fix the RS and CS signals to TRUE or to use the signal for flow control Software handshaking Select whether to use the X ON and X OFF signals to control the transmitted data only or both the transmitted and received data X ON ASCII 11H X OFF ASCII 13H Received buffer size 2047 bytes RS 422A 485 Interface Speci
250. ss the arrow key to move the cursor to the Disp amp Event data box FTP transfer file Disp amp Eyent data Report off Snapshot 5 Press either the On or Off soft key On Off ee e Selecting whether or not to transfer the report data file ON OFF 6 Set whether or not to transfer the report data file using the same method as steps 4 and 5 e Selecting whether or not to transfer the screen image data file ON OFF 7 Set whether or not to transfer the screen image data file using the same method as steps 4 and 5 For the DX100P confirm the new settings pressing the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 5 Setting the FTP Client Setting the primary FTP server For DX100P when settings are confirmed by procedure 7 press the ESC key to return to the communication function setting menu and then press the 4 FTP connection soft key to display the communication FTP connection menu 8 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the FTP connection box Tr connection 9 Press the Primary soft key O e Setting the FTP server name 10 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the FTP server name box FTP connection Primary FTP server nane iii Dant nimbhan a 11 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box SS 12
251. ssion function setting sie e mail transmission test cece ee eeeeeeeeteeeteeaeeeteteeeeteaees END flag error Log erro message noian a aeieea ESC key ses cscesudiiet pei are a reva t riii i escape code Ethernet interface Connector cececeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees EXECUTION MOG cceceeceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteeeetteneeeess F FIFO b fenin naai Wate a aaa Ms file transfer destination directory filter aingi naar first login flag we flag FIFO FLOAT_B FLOAT_L flow of operation free messages front panel FTP eecenenrs tina tits isa naa atat iy RIP ClOntiss2t nnan a a A a a FTP client setting FTP COMNOCHION s c02 ects diced eter SY ee FIP Sener odere hha arere ae hi oy tau aoea temas FTP server name RIRMCSE EE TAA ae en es FUNC key e ieee den raided wid ana NE NAT functional structure Ethernet interface functional structure serial interface 0 0 0 tees H NANASNAKING ice cecserecscencsevesecnecerenccecereeececeendareevcc eens 3 3 3 10 NE ACEr SUM xcs wise sehen Ate aaron eae 6 3 NOIG TEGISTOR osc nevesricttivcncteseasare onire inea iiair 4 2 host name Index 2 IM 04L05A01 17E Index identifier BINARY data cece ee eseeeeeeceeseeeeseseeeeeeees 6 3 indicator initial patheni naaa input range parameter ss sesseseeriesierirerrerinernerenrrnerenrineree input register eee inst
252. system mode e In order to activate the settings that are changed using the commands the settings must be saved using the YE command Otherwise new settings will not be activated If the DXP is configured to allow the calibration correction settings to be changed while data acquisition is in progress an e The settings that are returned in response to a query in the system mode will contain the new settings even if they are not saved with the YE command However the new settings will not be activated until they are saved Command Function Execution Mode Setting Monitor Page Name Function Function XA Sets alarm related settings S Yes No 5 18 XI Sets the A D integral time S Yes No 5 18 XB Sets the burn out S Yes No 5 18 XJ Sets the RJC S Yes No 5 18 XV Sets the scan interval S Yes No 5 18 BI Sets the application S Yes No 5 18 XT Selects the temperature unit S Yes No 5 19 XS Sets the channels to display the trend S Yes No 5 19 and acquire the data XM Sets the conditions used to acquire S Yes No 5 19 display event data to the internal memory or save the data to the external storage medium XU Sets the channel identification display S Yes No 5 19 memory alarm time language whether or not to use the partial expanded display and the remote controller ID XR Sets the remote action sS Yes No 5 19 XQ Sets the timer Ss Yes No 5 20 RO Sets the report type and generation time S Yes No 5 20 RM Sets the report channel S Yes No 5 21 XO Sel
253. t Y gt When handshaking is used the DXP stops data reception when A _ data in the buffer cannot be Amount of used space is 1537 bytes Free processed fast enough and the amount of used space reaches 1537 bytes After the data reception is stopped as described above pa data in the buffer continues to Y yen Amount of used space is 511 bytes Free be passed to the internal program When the amount of used space falls to 511 bytes it resumes data reception If the buffer becomes full in as sccm control all overflow data are discarded Amount of used space is FULL IM 04L05A01 17E 3 9 suondo 9 Z3 e9e 19 U jenas y Huisn B 3 5 Configuring the Serial Interface This section describes the setting procedure to use the setting measurement function or the barcode input To configure the interface for the Modbus see chapter 4 Selecting the baud rate Select the baud rate from the following list 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Selecting the data length Select the data length from the following list Make sure to select 8 bits when outputting data in binary format 7 8 Selecting the parity check Select the parity check from the following list Odd Even None Selecting the handshaking method Select the handshaking method from the following list This setting is valid only for the RS 232 interface Off Off XON XON XON RS CS RS Selecting the address Select the address from the fo
254. t channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p3 last channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 Output the most recent measured computed data from channel 1 to 5 in ASCII format FD 0 01 05 Set the parameters for the first and last channel numbers so that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number IM 04L05A01 17E 5 35 5 7 Output Commands Parameters p2 and p3 are valid when p1 0 1 4 or 5 FF Outputs FIFO data Syntax FF pl p2 p3 p4 lt terminator gt pl Operation type GET Output the data starting from the next to the previous read position RESEND Retransmit the previous output RESET Set the read position to the most recent acquire position GETNEW Output the newest data p2 First channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 p3 last channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31 to 42 DX200P 01 to 30 p4 The upper limit of number of blocks that are to be loaded 1 to 120 1 to 240 for models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P 1 to 60 for models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and Dx230P If the measured computed data is less than the specified number of blocks only the available data are transmitted Example Output two blocks of FIFO data from channels 1 to 10 FF GET 01 10 2 Description e The FIFO buffer is of a circular type which overacquires from the oldest data when it is full The FR command is used to set the acq
255. t signal 5 SG Signal Ground Signal ground 7 RS Request to Send Handshaking signal used when receiving data from the PC Output signal 8 CS Clear to Send Handshaking signal used when sending data to the PC Input signal Pins 1 4 6 and 9 are not used Table of RS 232 Standard Signal and Their JIS and ITU T Abbreviations Pin No 9 pin connector Abbreviation RS 232 AB GND ITU T Description JIS Signal ground BA TXD Transmitted data BB RXD Received data CA RTS Request to send Connection Procedure Signal direction CB CTS lt _ RS Request to send CS Clear to send gt lt SD Send data RD Receive data gt Clear to send 3 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 3 2 RS 232 Interface Connector Pin Arrangement and Signal Names the Connection Procedure and Handshaking Connection example e OFF OFF KON XON e CS RS CTS RTS PC DXP PC DXP SD 3 SD SD 3 SD RD gt 2 RD RD RD RS 7 RS RS 7 RS cs 8 CS cs 8 cs SG 5 SG SG 5 SG XON RS XON RTS The RS on the PC side and the CS a pr on the instrument side do not need RoD gt lt rp tobe connected for control RS 7 RS However we recommend that they cs 8 CS be connected so that the cable SG 5 SG can be connected in either direction Handshaking When using the RS 232 interfac
256. t time amm ss xxx yyy amm SS xXxX yyy Deviation from the adjustment time a Sign behind ahead mm Ss XXX yyy mm minutes ss seconds xxx milliseconds yyy microseconds Space Example EA 99 05 11 12 20 00 AlarmACK KEY administrator4567890 01 06 12 12 30 00 CCset0l KEY uchiyama Point 002 gt 003 01 06 12 12 30 00 CCset0l KEY uchiyama 03 1234567 1234555 gt 1234567 1234666 01 06 12 12 30 00 TRevStart KEY uchiyama Adjust time 01 01 125 000 01 06 12 12 30 00 TRevEnd SYS uchiyama 01 06 12 12 30 00 Error085 KEY EN IM 04L05A01 17E 6 13 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data Output of a Selected Operation Log The Fl command is used to output the data e The log of operations using the DXP keys or the remote control function is output Up to 2000 logs are retained in the internal memory Logs that exceed 2000 are cleared from the oldest data Syntax Same as the operation log Example Assume that an operation log of the following 8 items is stored EA 99 05 11 12 20 00 AlarmACK KEY yoshino 99 05 11 12 30 00 ChgPasswd KEY tsuchiya 01 06 11 10 00 00 TimeAdj REM tsuchiya 01 06 12 12 30 00 MathStart KEY uchiyama 01 06 13 12 30 00 MathStop KEY uchiyama 01 06 14 12 30 00 Message KEY uchiyama 01 06 15 12 30 00 MathStart KEY tsuchiya 01 06 16 12 30 00 MathStop KEY tsuchiya EN As shown below the logs that match the conditions specified by the command are extracted and output For the command FIO Math
257. tax EACRLF ddd ccc bbb aaaCRLF ENCRLF aaa Status information 1 000 to 255 bbb Status information 2 000 to 255 ccc Status information 3 000 to 255 ddd Status information 4 000 to 255 Example EA 000 000 032 000 EN 6 20 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data File List The ME command is used to output the data e The file list and the file data sizes of the specified directory on the DXP s external storage medium are output Free space of the DXP s external storage medium is output Syntax EACRLF ffffffff_eee_ssssssss_yy mo dd_hh mi ssCRLF zzzzzzz_ Kbyte freeCRLF ENCRLF yy ffffffff eee ssssssss yy mo dd hh mi ss ZZZZZZZ Year 00 to 99 File name 8 characters When this is a directory the characters lt DIR gt is shown at the position displaying the file data size Extension 3 characters Data size of the file 0 to 99999999 byte Year 00 to 99 Month 01 to 12 Day 01 to 31 Hour 00 to 23 Minute 00 to 59 Second 00 to 59 Free space on the medium 0 to 9999999 suods y Space Example File list 124 99 02 24 20 07 12 12310 1204 99 01 19 01 52 37 lt DIR gt 99 01 19 01 23 64 523 Kbytes free EA Xv1 DEV Xv1 PNL DATA EN Example Check disk EA 523 Kbytes free EN IM 04L05A01 17E 6 21 6 3 Output Format of BINARY Data Relay Status The FD command is used to output the data The ON OFF stat
258. ted All functions Setting measurement server FTP server FTP client Web server E mail transmission SNTP server SNTP client IM 04L05A01 17E SUO I IUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD 3y JO M IM AQ 1 2 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Serial Interface This section describes the communication function using the serial interface C2 C3 option For a description of how to use the Ethernet interface see chapters 3 and 4 Functional Structure The following figure shows the relationship between the communication function of the DXP and the serial interface The communication functions of the DXP Modbus Modbus Setting Barcode slave master measurement input function Application Modbus Modbus Normal Barcode slave master protocol protocol protocol protocol Protocol Serial interface Interface RS 232 RS 422A 485 Connect the DXP and the PC using a serial interface cable When using the serial communications choose an application from the four in the above figure 1 10 IM 04L05A01 17E 1 2 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Serial Interface Setting Measurement Function The communication function using a normal protocol is the same as the function of the setting measurement server on the Ethernet network For a description of how to use the communication function using the normal protocol see section 3 6 Serial communications Command
259. ted with sub delimiter 350 Command is not permitted to the current user level 351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode 352 The option is not installed 353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting 354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating 360 Output interface must be chosen from Ethernet or Serial 362 There are no data to send NEXT or RESEND 363 All data have already been transferred 367 Password change denied because another user is logged in App 18 IM 04L05A01 17E Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages e Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen Code Message 390 Command error 391 Delimiter error 392 Parameter error 393 No permission 394 No such connection 395 Use quit to close this connection 396 Failed to disconnect 397 No TCP control block e Other Communication Errors See appendix 4 e Status Messages Code Message 559 This command must be used with LL command e Cautions Code Message Ref section 600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized See section 4 13 601 Measured data have been initialized See sections 4 13 and 3 5 610 This user name is already registered See section 4 4
260. ternet Explorer ox Active Message Message No 1 C Message No 5 Message No 2 Message No 6 C Message No 3 C Message No 7 Message No 4 C Message No 8 Input Characters Enters message Cancels message entered Sets and write message e u JOUJAYTy ey Buisp Selects message Command Response I Displays the response from the DXP e Performing alarm ACK operation on individual alarms only when not using the login function Individual alarms can be acknowledged on the overview screen in the same manner as the key operation on the DXP IM 04L05A01 17E 2 41 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function Explanation To use the e mail transmission function set the following parameters in addition to those described in section 2 3 Basic settings of e mail SMTP server name Set the SMTP server name or IP address of the SMTP server using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Port number Set the port number to use The default value is 25 Recipient 1 Set the transmission destination of the e mail message using up to 150 alphanumeric characters You can specify multiple addresses To specify multiple addresses delimit the addresses using spaces Recipient 2 Set the transmission destination of the e mail message using up to 150 alphanumeric characters You can specify multiple addresses To specify multiple addresses delimit the addresses using spaces Sender
261. ters The default value is DX Alarm_summary e Header Set the string to be attached to the e mail message using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Header2 Set the string to be attached to the e mail message using up to 64 alphanumeric characters Settings when transmitting e mail messages at the specified time Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Turn On Off for each recipient e On Transmits e mail messages to the recipient e Off Does not transmit e mail messages to the recipient Interval Time interval used to repeat the e mail transmission starting from the Ref Time Select from the following list of choices for each recipient th 2h 3h 4h 6h 8h 12h and 24h Ref Time Specify the time when the e mail message is transmitted in the following range for each recipient The e mail transmission is repeated every Interval from this point 00 00 to 23 59 Example If Ref Time is 17 15 and Interval is 8h e mail messages are transmitted at 17 15 01 15 and 09 15 Contents of the transmitted mail See Contents of the transmitted mail on the previous page The default value for Subject is DX Periodic_data Settings when transmitting e mail messages at the time of recovery from a power failure System E Mail settings For the transmitted contents of the system mail see section 1 1 Recipient 1 Recipient 2 Turn On Off for each recipient e On Transmits e mail messages to the recipient e Off Does not transmit e mail mess
262. the top of the data on which the sum is calculated len Length of the data on which the sum is calculated Returned value Calculated sum af int cksum unsigned char buff int len unsigned short p Pointer to the next two byte data word in the buffer that is to be summed unsigned int csum Checksum value int i int odd csum 0 Initialize odd len 2 Check whether or not the number of data points is even len gt gt 1 Determine the number of data points using a short data type p unsigned short buff for i 0 i lt len i Sum using an unsigned short data type csum ptt if odd When the data length is odd union tmp Pad with a 0 and add to the unsigned short data unsigned short s unsigned char c 2 tmp tmp c 1 0 tmp c 0 unsigned char p csum tmp s if csum csum amp Oxffff csum gt gt 16 amp Oxffff gt Oxffff Add the overflowed digits csum csum Oxffff If the digit overflows again add a 1 return csum amp Oxffff bit inversion 6 4 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 1 Response Syntax RS 422A 485 Dedicated Response The following table shows dedicated commands for the RS 422A 485 interface and their responses Command syntax Meaning Response ESC O_xx CRLF _ Space Open the instrument Response from the instrument with the specified address ESC O xx CRLF Re
263. ther details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 293 Character String and Details SEND The DXP s IP address has not been specified correctly Check the IP address BROKEN Access to the SNTP server manually several times If this error occurs check the SNTP server 294 No time correction because excess time deviation with SNTP server Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 294 Character String and Details OVER This error occurs when a periodic time adjustment does not operate because the time deviation between the time of the DXP internal clock and the SNTP server exceeds ten minutes Check the time on the DXP and the SNTP server 1 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer 2 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission bad cable connection duplicate addresses network equipment failure IM 04L05A01 17E App 17 xipueddy Ey Appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Communication Errors An English error message is returned via the communication interface It is not displayed on the screen e Errors Related to Engineering Mode Setting System Mode Setting Control and Output Command Execution Code Message 300 Command is too long 301 Too many number of commands delimited with 302 This command has not been defined 303 Data request command can not be enumera
264. time a s Data status ae Normal S D Differential input 9 S Skip 0 Over Error k Channel type 0 Measurement channel A Computation channel cc Channel number 01 to 60 ai1az2a3aa al Alarm status alarm number 1 a2 Alarm status alarm number 2 a3 Alarm status alarm number 3 a4 Alarm status alarm number 4 Each status is set to H L h 1 R r T t or space H upper limit alarm L lower limit alarm h difference upper limit alarm 1 difference lower limit alarm R upper limit on rate of change alarm r lower limit on rate of change alarm T delay upper limit alarm t delay lower limit alarm space no alarm uuuuuu Unit information 6 characters left justified mV mV V V MG aG XXXXXX user defined character string IM 04L05A01 17E 6 7 6 2 Output Format of ASCII Data ddddd PP Example EA Sign Mantissa 00000 to 99999 5 digits 8 digits for computed data For abnormal data data status is E or data of which the mantissa or the exponent exceeds the range data status is O the mantissa is set to 99999 99999999 for computed data Exponent 00 to 04 Space DATE 99 02 23 TIME 19 56 32 500 N 001h mV N 002 mV S 003 EN Note 12345E 03 67890E 01 e Data for non existing channels are not output not even the channel number e For channels set to Skip output values from alarm status to exponent are spaces Communication Log The FL command
265. ting parameters and the limitations regarding the procedures Follow the steps indicated with numbers The procedures are given with the premise that the user is carrying out the steps for the first time Depending on the operation not all steps need to be taken IM 04L05A01 17E iii Names and Uses of Parts Front Panel DX100P D DXISSP YOKOGAWA x LCD monitor lt ISP NTER Soft keys Press these keys to select the menu displayed on the FUNC key screen MENU key ESC key Press this key to return to the previous screen or cancel the new settings Arrow keys Press these keys to move between the setup items displayed on the screen DISP ENTER key Press this key when confirming the setting or when closing the entry box Press the MENU key to enter the engineering mode Press the FUNC key to display the FUNC key menu such as FTP test e mail transmission test and log display DX200P YOKOGAWA a LCD monitor Pres Soft keys MENU key FUNC key Press these keys parameters such address domain and server name Arrow keys Press these keys to move between the setup items displayed on the screen DISP ENTER key s this key when c
266. to recipient 1 or recipient 2 that you specified in section 2 12 to confirm whether or not e mail messages can be transmitted Items to check before performing this test Connect the Ethernet cable correctly For the connection procedure see section 2 2 e Check that the Ethernet interface settings are correct For the procedure see section 2 3 e Check that the e mail settings are correct For the procedure see section 2 12 When setting the Ethernet interface or e mail check the settings with your system or network administrator Checking the results of the e mail transmission test The result of the e mail transmission test can be confirmed by displaying the e mail log displayed on the DXP see section 8 9 of the DX100P DX200P User s Manual or Web screen see section 2 11 or by outputting the logs using the FL command see section 2 7 If an error message is displayed on the DXP see appendix 6 A List of Error Messages Conients of the test e mail message The figure below shows the contents of the test e mail message From DX good co jp Date Sat 23 Dec 2000 07 25 20 0900 JST Subject DX Test_mail To user1 good co jp Test mail lt Host name gt DX lt Time gt Dec 23 07 25 20 1 Press the FUNC key The FUNC menu appears The structure of the FUNC menu varies depending on the basic settings and options 2 Press the E Mail test soft key A menu appears for you to select the rec
267. try box C 17 Enter the slave address in the entry box e Register 18 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Register box Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 o co zf J i ae f INTI6 19 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box eS 20 Enter the slave address in the entry box e Type 21 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Type box Commu Data Slave First Last Address Registers Type 1 on fom fe om J 1 J en Te 22 Press one of the soft keys from INT16 to FLOAT_L to select the register type INT16 UINTI6 INT32 B INTS2_L UINT32_B UINTS2_L Next 1 2 M M MM M amp Confirming Canceling the new settings 23 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 4 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 4 6 Checking the Operating Status of the Modbus Master Function Displaying the read data The data that is read can be displayed by writing a computing equation using the communication input data on a computation channel M1 option For information on the use of the computation channel see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO04L06A01 01E Confirming the Modbus Status MODBUS ST
268. ttached 120 1 2 W or more Terminator externally attached RS 232 RS 422A 485 pins on the DXP SDA spa SD A TD O SDA O SDA O c SDA mO SD B SD B SD B TD O SDB O SDB O SDB O RD A RD A RD A Y RD O RD A O RD A O RD A RD B KX RD_B W RD B RD O RD B O RD B O RD B O SG SG SHIELD SG SG FG FG 4 a 7 n Converter in lt 32 Do not connect terminator to 1 to n 1 3 6 IM 04L05A01 17E 3 3 RS 422A 485 Interface Pin Arrangement Signal Names and the Connection Procedure Two wire system Connect the transmission and reception signals with the same polarity on the RS 422A 485 terminal block The two wire system can be used only when using the Modbus protocol Host computer Terminator externally attached 120 1 2 W or more Terminator externally attached RS 422A 485 pins on the DXP SDA SoA A A i __ sos SDB sal RDA e RDB i 8 n n lt 31 Do not connect terminator to 1 to n 1 The following diagram illustrates the case when the host computer s interface is RS 232 Host computer Terminator externally attached 120 Q 1 2 W or more Terminator externally attached RS 232 RS 422A 485 pins on the DXP SD
269. uiring interval e There are two types of output method GET and GETNEW GET Output the specified number of blocks p4 of FIFO data starting from the next to the previous read position block Make sure to read the data within the following buffer period to prevent data dropouts e For models DX102P DX104P DX204P and DX208P FIFO buffer length 240 intervals scan interval Maximum buffer period 240 x acquiring period For models DX106P DX112P DX210P DX220P and DX230P FIFO buffer length 60 intervals scan interval Maximum buffer period 60 x acquiring period GETNEW Output the specified number of blocks p4 of FIFO data back starting from the recent acquire position block Parameters p2 and p4 are valid when p1 is set to GET or GETNEW If p4 is omitted all the data of all blocks acquired in the FIFO buffer are output Set the parameters for the first and last channel numbers so that the last channel number is greater than or equal to the first channel number e For the output flow of FIFO data see appendix 2 FL Outputs logs alarm summary and message summary Syntax FL pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Log type COM Communication FTPC FTP client ERR Operation error KEY Operation WEB Web operation EMAIL E mail transmission ALARM Alarm summary MSG Message summary PANEL Setting change SNTP Access to SNTP server p2 Maximum read length of the log When pl is COM 1 to 200 When pl is ALARM 1 to 200
270. uisition is started Saving the settings To activate the settings that have been changed in the system mode the settings must be saved Otherwise the settings that existed before the change are activated IM 04L05A01 17E 2 59 eu u JOUJEYTy ey Buisn D 2 16 Setting the SNTP Server Function or SNTP Client Function Procedure For the basic flow of operations see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi For the procedures related to entering character strings and values see the DX100P DX200P User s Manual IM04L05A01 01E IMO04L06A01 01E 1 Enter the system mode 2 Press the 12 SNTP DX100P or 10 SNTP DX200P soft key to display the SNTP setting menu 3 Press the 1 Basic settings soft key The SNTP Basic settings menu appears SNTP Basic settings DX100P SNTP Basic settings DX200P SNTP server settings z A Server settings Use Not Not Use Not Use _ SNTP client settings Use Not r Client settings Server name Pan Use Port b erver name K aa Port number 123 Access interval feces interval Ch Access reference time Access reference tine 00 00 Access timeout Access timeout its Use Not Use Not Setting the SNTP server function 4 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Server settings Use Not box 5 Press the Use or Not soft key Use Not ee ag This completes the setting of the SNTP server function Settin
271. unction Confirming Canceling the new settings 57 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Report E Mail e Recipient 1 Recipient 2 58 Set the address of the recipient 1 and 2 using the same method as steps 24 and 25 e Add sender URL Uniform Resource Locator 59 Set whether add or not the sender URL to the e mail message using the same method as steps 30 and 31 e Subject 60 Set the subject using the same method from steps 32 through 35 e Header 61 Set the header using the same method from steps 36 through 39 Confirming Canceling the new settings 62 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 2 50 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 13 Using the E Mail Transmission Function Required Settings Follow the procedures below to use the e mail transmission function Section 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Section 2 12 Setting the E Mail Transmission Function Performing an E Mail Transmission Test Explanation Procedure You can transmit a test e mail message
272. unction 1 monitor function up to 2 Connect to a different function or use quit to exit 405 Input user ID Input user ID 407 Password has expired Please enter a new password The password is expired Enter a new password 408 Enter password again for confirmation Reenter the password for confirmation 409 This password is not correct or was already used The password is incorrect Or the password has been used in the past The combinations of user IDs and passwords that are identical to those specified by other users or those that have been registered in the past cannot be specified Enter the password using 6 to 8 alphanumeric characters Spaces cannot be used for the password 420 Connection has been lost The specified function name setting or monitor is incorrect Or quit was used for the user name Communication has been disconnected Enter the correct function name using lowercase letters You cannot use quit as a user name 421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded Attempted to connect exceeding the maximum number of simultaneous connections Drop other connections first 422 Communication has timed out Connection has been dropped due to communication timeout Enter the function name user name user ID and password within two minutes 450 This entry is incorrect User information is incorrect Communication has been disconnected Check the user name
273. us of the installed alarm output relay is output Syntax EACRLF 101 106 aaaaaaCRLF I11 116 bbbbbbCRLF I21 126 ccccccCRLF 131 136 ddddddCRLF ENCRLF aaaaaa The status of 101 102 103 104 105 and 106 is indicated from the left bbbbbb The status of I11 112 113 114 115 and 116 is indicated from the left eccccc The status of 121 122 123 124 125 and 126 is indicated from the left dddddd The status of 131 132 133 134 135 and 136 is indicated from the left 1 Relay ON 0 Relay OFF Relay not installed Only the 101 106 line is output for the DX100P all four lines are output for the DX200P Example For the DX200P EA I01 106 1111 T11 116 1111 I21 126 I31 136 EN User Information The FU command is used to output the data When pi 0 Outputs the own user name user level and other information about the user currently logged in Syntax EACRLF p_l_uuu uCRLF sss _eeeeee mmm _cCRLF ENCRLF p Physical layer E Ethernet S RS 232 or RS 422A 485 1 User level A Administrator U User 6 22 IM 04L05A01 17E 6 3 Output Format of BINARY Data uuu sss eeeeece Example EA User name up to 20 characters It is set to serial for serial communications If the login function is not used and connection is established with the setting function or the monitor function via the Ethernet interface it is set to admin or us
274. users that are logged into the DXP e Status byte shows the DXP status e Data on the external storage medium can be output e Measured computed data can be output in BINARY or ASCII format Fora description of the data output format see chapter 6 e Monitor Function The operations described in Output DXP data can be carried out You cannot set or control the DXP Dedicated Commands Uses dedicated commands for the DXP See chapter 5 1 2 IM 04L05A01 17E 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface FTP Server Login To use the setting measurement server log into the setting function or monitor function by entering a user name user ID and password that are registered in the DXP DXP X Setting function _ Administrator User A portion of the setting function e Administrators or users can log into the setting function e Multiple users cannot log in simultaneously lf an administrator or user is already logged in using the keys on the DXP you cannot log into the setting function e Login is not possible if there is a user logged into the setting function via the serial interface e Users can only execute a portion of the control commands see section 2 7 such as Starting stopping data acquisition An administrator or a user can log into the monitor function Up to two users can log in at once You cannot log in using the same user name Communication
275. val 3600 The scan interval unit is in seconds BD Sets the alarm delay time Syntax BD pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Channel number DX100P 01 to 12 or 31to 42 DX200P 01 to 60 p2 Alarm delay time 1 to 3600 s Query BD pl Example Set the alarm delay time for channel 01 to 120 s BD 01 120 BG Sets the message group Syntax BG pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Message group number 1 to 7 p2 Group name up to 16 characters Query BG pl Example Set the group name of the message group 7 to Process2 BG 7 Process2 BL Sets use not use the lot number and automatic increment of the lot number Syntax BL pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Use not use the lot number USE NOT p2 Use not use the auto increment of the lot number ON OFF Query BL Example Use the lot number and the auto increment of the lot number BL USE ON Description Parameter p2 is valid when p1 USE BH Sets the batch header Syntax BH pl p2 lt terminator gt pl Header number 1 to 3 p2 Character string up to 64 characters Query BH pl Example Set Manager A to the header 1 BH 1 Manager A EH Sets the calibration correction Set the calibration correction in the following order You must carry out the steps in order to set it correctly 1 Set the number of break points BEGIN 2 Set the break points for the number of break points SET 3 Confirm the settings END Set the number of break points Syntax EH pl p2
276. verview of the operations Follow the operating procedures on your PC 1 Start the browser and open the monitor page of the DXP If access control is specified proceed to step 2 Otherwise proceed to step 5 Entering the user name and password e Entering the user name 2 A window appears for you to enter the user name and password Enter the user name Enter Network Password Va Please type your uses name and password Site 10 0 23223 Ream UserName Password I Save this password in your password ist CEJ o e Entering the password 3 Enter the password All characters are displayed as asterisks If the Save the password check box is selected the window appears with the saved password the next time all characters are displayed as asterisks 4 Click OK to display the monitor page Auto refreshing the display Click Auto Refresh to specify ON or OFF Refreshing the display manually Click Refresh in the display menu section to refresh the page Zooming in or out of the display Click Zoom to specify 100 or 75 DX200P or 100 or 200 DX100P Displaying the alarm summary Click Alarm summary in the display menu section to display the alarm summary Click Refresh to refresh the alarm summary information Click Close to close the alarm summary window Displaying measured computed data Click All channels in the display menu section to display the measured computed data Click R
277. x Ethernet IP address B B B 8 Subnet mask d o 8 Nafaul antanas Ma A A A 5 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box Input 6 Enter the IP address of the DXP in the entry box 7 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the IP address box Setting the subnet mask Set this value according to the system or the network to which the DXP belongs If this setting is not necessary go to Setting the default gateway 8 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Subnet mask box Ethernet IP address l 6 B 0 Subnet mask b B B B Pett ankan La a a a 9 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box _ Input 5 IM 04L05A01 17E 2 5 e u JOUJOYTy ey Buisn D 2 3 Configuring the Ethernet Interface 10 Inthe entry box enter the subnet mask of the network to which the DXP belongs 11 Press the DISP ENTER key The entered value is set in the Subnet mask box Setting the default gateway Set this value according to the system or the network to which the DXP belongs If this setting is not necessary go to Setting the DNS Domain Name System 12 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Default gateway box Ethernet IP address l 6 B 8 Subnet mask 8 Default gateway B B B 13 Press the Input soft key to display the entry box C 14 In the entry box enter the default gateway of the network to which th
278. y for the RS 232 interface 10 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Handshaking box Parity Even RS 232 Handshaking jie NA anna aac 11 Press one of the soft keys from Off Off to CS RS to select the handshaking method ee qm aw Selecting the address Valid for the RS 422A 485 interface and the Modbus protocol 12 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Address box RS 422A 485 Address Protocol Normal 13 Press one of the soft keys from 1 to 32 to select the address E E E E E E Setting the protocol to Normal 14 Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Protocol box RS 422A 485 Address 1 Protocol 15 Press the Normal soft key or Barcode soft key Off Normal Modbus Modbus Barcode CO Co CODO E Setting the Memory out The Memory out is displayed if the serial communication function is equipped 16 Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the Memory out box Henory out Ethernet 17 Press the Ethernet soft key Ethernet Serial ae Confirming Canceling the new settings 18 To confirm the new settings press the DISP ENTER key To cancel press the ESC key For detailed operations regarding confirmation and cancellation see Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi Storing the new settings See Flow of Operation using the Operation Keys on page vi 3 12 IM 04L05A01 17E 3
279. you are required to log in using the user information registered on the DXP Only users that are allowed to log in via communications can log in You do not have to log in when connecting to the SNTP server Time information can be retrieved from the DXP according to the settings on the client machine Note If no administrators are registered you cannot use the login function To comply with 21 CFR Part11 of FDA register at least one administrator when using the DXP IM 04L05A01 17E 1 1 SUO I JIUNY UO ICIIUNWIWOD 3y JO M IM AQ 1 1 Overview of the Communication Function Using the Ethernet Interface Setting Measurement Server For the procedure in using the setting measurement server see section 2 7 Ethernet Setting Function and Monitor Function The following two functions are available e Setting Function e DXP Setup Sets the engineering mode and system mode items of the DXP DXP Operation Operations that can be performed using keys of the DXP can be controlled However you cannot apply electronic signature to measured computed data or switch the DXP screen to the log screen e Output DXP Data e The DXP data can be output Measured computed data outputs the newest data Log Communication log FTP log error log operation log Web operation log E mail log alarm summary message summary setting change log and SNTP log Setup data Screen image data of the DXP snapshot Information on

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

Welland ME-740J  PDF-Download  miroCRYSTAL VR 2000 miroCRYSTAL VR 4000  AirLive WN-300USB User`s Manual - Airlivecam.eu  Operating instructions - Rainbow Heat and Power  Epson AcuLaser C9200D3TNC  取扱説明書 - KAWAJUN  PAT2S/PAT3S  TABLE OF CONTENTS ÍNDICE  STL v3.03 User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
DMCA: DMCA_mwitty#outlook.com.